service reference guide
HP Compaq dx7300 Business PC
1st Edition
This document provides information on the removal and replacement of all
parts as well as information on troubleshooting, Desktop Management, setup
utilities, PATA and SATA drives, safety, routine care, connector pin
assignments, POST error messages, and diagnostic indicator lights.
Document Part Number 433611-001
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Reference Guide
HP Compaq dx7300 Business PC
1st Edition
Document Part Number: 433611-001
September 2006
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT, and Windows XP are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S. and other countries.
Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying
such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be
photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard
Company.
WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily
Å
Ä
harm or loss of life.
CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to
equipment or loss of information.
Service Reference Guide
HP Compaq dx7300 Business PC
First Edition (September 2006)
Document Part Number: 433611-001
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
1 Installing the Operating System
1.1 Installing or Upgrading Device Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 Transferring Files and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1.3 Creating a Disc Recovery Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
2 Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
2.1 Power-On Self-Test (POST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 Computer Setup Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.2.1 Using Computer Setup (F10) Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.2.2 Computer Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.2.3 Recovering the Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.3 HP Insight Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.3.1 Accessing HP Insight Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
2.3.2 Survey Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
2.3.3 Test Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2.3.4 Status Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2.3.5 Log Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2.3.6 Help Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2.3.7 Saving and Printing Information in HP Insight Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
2.3.8 Downloading the Latest Version of HP Insight Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
3 Desktop Management
3.1 Initial Configuration and Deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.1 HP OpenView Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.2 Altiris Deployment Solution Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.3 HP Backup and Recovery Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.2 Remote System Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.3 Software Updating and Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.3.1 HP Client Management Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.3.2 HP System Software Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.3.3 HP Client Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.3.4 HP ProtectTools Security Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.3.5 HP Client Premium Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.3.6 HP Client Foundation Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.3.7 HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.3.8 HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.3.9 Intel vPro-branded PCs with Active Management Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.3.10Proactive Change Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.3.11Subscriber’s Choice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.3.12Retired Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
Sercice Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
3.4 ROM Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.4.1 Remote ROM Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.4.2 HPQFlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.4.3 Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.4.4 Replicating the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.4.5 Dual-State Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
3.4.6 HP Web Site Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
3.4.7 Industry Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
3.5 Asset Tracking and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
3.5.1 Password Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3.5.2 Establishing a Setup Password Using Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3.5.3 Establishing a Power-On Password Using Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20
3.5.4 DriveLock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
3.5.5 Smart Cover Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
3.5.6 Cable Lock Provision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
3.5.7 Fingerprint Identification Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
3.6 Fault Notification and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
3.6.1 Drive Protection System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
3.6.2 Surge-Tolerant Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
3.6.3 Thermal Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
4 Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features
4.1 SATA Hard Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.2 SATA Hard Drive Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.2.1 SATA Data Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.2.2 SATA Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.3 PATA Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4 ATA SMART Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.5 Hard Drive Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
5 Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5.1 Chassis Designations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1.1 Microtower (MT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1.2 Slim Tower (ST). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.2 Electrostatic Discharge Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.2.1 Generating Static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.2.2 Preventing Electrostatic Damage to Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.2.3 Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.2.4 Grounding the Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.2.5 Recommended Materials and Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.3 Operating Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4 Routine Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4.1 General Cleaning Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4.2 Cleaning the Computer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.4.3 Cleaning the Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.4.4 Cleaning the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.4.5 Cleaning the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.5 Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
iv
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
5.5.1 Power Supply Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.5.2 Tools and Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.5.3 Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.5.4 Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.5.5 Hard Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.5.6 Lithium Coin Cell Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
6 Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.1 Preparation for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.2 External Security Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.2.1 Installing a Cable Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.2.2 Installing a Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.3 Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.4 Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.5 Front Drive Bezels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6.5.1 5.25" Drive Bezel Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6.5.2 Diskette Drive Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
6.5.3 3.5" Drive Bezel Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
6.6 Cable Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
6.6.1 Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
6.7 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11
6.8 Expansion Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13
6.9 Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–17
6.9.1 Drive Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–17
6.9.2 Removing a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–18
6.9.3 Installing a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–20
6.10Chassis Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–23
6.11Front I/O Panel Housing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–24
6.12Front I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–25
6.13Power Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–26
6.14Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–27
6.15Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–29
6.16Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–31
6.17Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32
6.18System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34
6.19Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35
6.19.1Type 1 Battery Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–36
6.19.2Type 2 Battery Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37
6.19.3Type 3 Battery Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38
7 Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.1 Preparation for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.3 Hood Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.4 External Security Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.4.1 Security Clip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.4.2 Cable Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.4.3 Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
7.5 Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.6 Front Drive Bezels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
7.7 Cable Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.7.1 Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.8 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.9 Vertically Oriented Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.9.1 Expansion Card Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.9.2 PCI Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.9.3 PCI Express Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.10PCI Riser Card Assembly and Backwall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.11Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.11.1Drive Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.11.2Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.11.3External 3.5-inch Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.11.4Primary Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.12Fan Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.13Front I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
7.14Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
7.15Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
7.16Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
7.17Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
7.18Chassis Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.19System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
7.20Drive Clutch Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
7.21Power Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
7.22Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
7.22.1Type 1 Battery Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
7.22.2Type 2 Battery Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
7.22.3Type 3 Battery Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
A Connector Pin Assignments
B Power Cord Set Requirements
C POST Error Messages
D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
E System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators
F Memory
Index
vi
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Installing the Operating System
CAUTION: Do not add optional hardware or third-party devices to your computer until the operating
system is successfully installed. Doing so may cause errors and may prevent the operating system from
installing properly.
Ä
Once the automatic installation has begun, DO NOT TURN OFF THE COMPUTER UNTIL THE PROCESS
IS COMPLETE. Turning off the computer during the installation process might damage the software that
runs the computer or prevent its proper installation.
Be sure there is a 10.2-cm (4-inch) clearance at the back of the unit and above the monitor to
permit the required airflow.
✎
✎
The first time the computer is turned on, the operating system is automatically installed. This
takes approximately 10 minutes, depending on the operating system being installed. Carefully
read and follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation.
If the computer shipped with more than one operating system language on the hard drive, the
installation process could take up to 60 minutes.
If the computer was not shipped with a Microsoft operating system, some portions of this
documentation do not apply. For complete operating system installation and configuring
instructions, refer to the operating system documentation. Additional information is available in
online help.
Microsoft security updates are available on the Microsoft Web site.
1.1 Installing or Upgrading Device Drivers
To install optional hardware devices after the operating system installation is complete, the
drivers for each of the devices must also be installed.
If prompted for the I386 directory, replace the path specification with C:\i386, or use the Browse
button in the dialog box to locate the i386 folder. This action points the operating system to the
appropriate drivers.
Obtain the latest support software, including support software for the operating system from
www.hp.com/support. Select the appropriate country and language then, select Download
drivers and software, enter the model number of the computer, and press Enter.
You can also obtain the latest support software on CDs. The following Web site provides
information on how to purchase a support software CD subscription:
http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files/desktops/us/purchase.html.
If the computer has a writable optical drive, install the appropriate application to be able to write
to the drive.
✎
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
1–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the Operating System
1.2 Transferring Files and Settings
Use the Microsoft Windows XP Files and Settings Transfer Wizard to move files and settings
from an old computer to a new one. Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools
> Files and Settings Transfer Wizard. Follow the wizard to transfer the files and settings to the
new computer.
1.3 Creating a Disc Recovery Set
CAUTION: HP no longer ships the Restore Plus! CD with PCs. Instead, HP Backup and Recovery
Ä
Manager is pre-loaded on each system. HP recommends the creation of a recovery CD as soon as the
computer has been set up. Creating the Restore Plus! CD set is important in the event that you ever need
to restore the system hard drive to its factory installed state.
HP Backup and Recovery Manager can create the Restore Plus CD set, This set includes the
Restore Plus CD, the Operating System CD, and any Supplemental Software CDs.
CAUTION: The Restore Plus CD set will not include any system settings or user data created after the
initial system setup.
Ä
T o create the Restore Plus CD set:
1. Click Start > HP Backup and Recovery > HP Backup and Recovery Manager to open
the Backup and Recovery Wizard, then click Next.
2. Select Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system.
3. Follow the instructions in the wizard.
The HP Backup and Recovery Manager can be used to back up data and system files to the hard
drive, to network drives, or to removable media, such as CDs, DVDs, or flash media. If data or
system files are lost, deleted, or corrupted, Backup and Recovery Manager allows you to retrieve
data or restore the last good system image.
CAUTION: HP recommends that a backup schedule be created immediately to ensure continued system
Ä
and data protection. Automatic backups can be scheduled using the HP Backup and Recovery Wizard.
Recovery Points, Entire Drive Backups, and File Backups can be automatically backed up without user
intervention. HP recommends scheduling Recovery Points Backups to provide the most comprehensive
coverage.
If HP Backup and Recovery Manager is preinstalled, the Restore Plus CD set and the initial
recovery point may be saved to disc as often as necessary, but only a single copy of the Microsoft
Windows CD can be created, due to licensing constraints.
✎
You can access a user manual at Start > HP Backup and Recovery > HP Backup and
Recovery Manager Manual.
If Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system is unavailable on the
system, the HP Restore Plus CD set can be obtained through product support on
http://welcome/country/us/en/contact_us.html.
1–2
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Setup Utilities (F10) and diagnostic features provide information needed about the computer
system when contacting Customer Support. These tools can also be used to:
■
Change factory default settings and to set or change the system configuration, which may be
necessary when you add or remove hardware.
■
Determine if all of the devices installed on the computer are recognized by the system and
functioning properly.
■
■
Determine information about the operating environment of the computer.
Solve system configuration errors detected but not automatically fixed during the Power-On
Self-Test (POST).
■
■
Establish and manage passwords and other security features.
Establish and manage energy-saving timeouts.
All features identified in this chapter may not be available on all HP products.
✎
2.1 Power-On Self-Test (POST)
POST is a series of diagnostic tests that runs automatically when the system is turned on. POST
checks the following items to ensure that the computer system is functioning properly:
■
■
■
■
■
Keyboard
Memory modules
All mass storage devices
Processors
Controllers
If the Power-On Password is set, a key icon appears on the screen while POST is running. You
will need to enter the password before continuing. Refer to Section 3.5, “Asset Tracking and
Security” for information on setting, deleting, or bypassing the password.
✎
If POST finds an error in the system, an audible and/or visual message occurs. For POST error
messages and their solutions refer to Appendix C, “POST Error Messages.”
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
2–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
2.2 Computer Setup Utilities
Use Computer Setup Utilities (F10) to:
■
■
■
Change factory default settings.
Set the system date and time.
Set, view, change, or verify the system configuration, including settings for processor,
graphics, memory, audio, storage, communications, and input devices.
■
■
Modify the boot order of bootable devices such as hard drives, diskette drives, optical drives,
or USB flash media devices.
Enable Quick Boot, which is faster than Full Boot but does not run all of the diagnostic tests
run during a Full Boot. You can set the system to:
❏
❏
❏
always Quick Boot (default);
periodically Full Boot (from every 1 to 30 days); or
always Full Boot.
■
Select Post Messages Enabled or Disabled to change the display status of Power-On
Self-Test (POST) messages. Post Messages Disabled suppresses most POST messages, such
as memory count, product name, and other non-error text messages. If a POST error occurs,
the error is displayed regardless of the mode selected. To manually switch to Post Messages
Enabled during POST, press any key (except F1 through F12).
■
■
■
■
■
Establish an Ownership Tag, the text of which is displayed each time the system is turned on
or restarted.
Enter the Asset Tag or property identification number assigned by the company to this
computer.
Enable the power-on password prompt during system restarts (warm boots) as well as during
power-on.
Establish a setup password that controls access to Computer Setup (F10) Utility and the
settings described in this section.
Secure integrated I/O functionality, including the serial, USB, or parallel ports, audio, or
embedded NIC, so that they cannot be used until they are unsecured.
■
■
■
Enable or disable removable media boot ability.
Enable or disable legacy diskette write ability (when supported by hardware).
Solve system configuration errors detected but not automatically fixed during the Power-On
Self-Test (POST).
■
Replicate the system setup by saving system configuration information on diskette and
restoring it on one or more computers.
■
■
Execute self-tests on a specified ATA hard drive (when supported by drive).
Enable or disable DriveLock security (when supported by drive).
2–2
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
2.2.1 Using Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
Computer Setup can be accessed only by turning on the computer or restarting the system. To
access the Computer Setup Utilities menu, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start >Shut Down >Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
If you do not press the F10 key at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again
press F10 when the monitor light turns green.
✎
3. Select your language from the list and press the Enter key.
4. A choice of five headings appears in the Computer Setup Utilities menu: File, Storage,
Security, Power, and Advanced.
5. Use the arrow (left and right) keys to select the appropriate heading. Use the arrow (up and
down) keys to select the option you want, then press Enter. To return to the Computer Setup
Utilities menu, press Esc.
6. To apply and save changes, select File > Save Changes and Exit.
❏
If you have made changes that you do not want applied, select Ignore Changes and
Exit.
❏
To reset to factory settings or previously saved default settings, select Set Defaults and
Exit. This option will restore the original factory system defaults.
CAUTION: Do NOT turn the computer power OFF while the BIOS is saving the F10 Computer Setup
changes because the CMOS could become corrupted. It is safe to turn off all power to the computer only
after exiting the F10 Setup screen.
Ä
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
2–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
2.2.2 Computer Setup Menu
Heading
Option
Description
File
System Information Lists:
• Product name
• SKU number (some models)
• Processor type/speed/stepping
• Cache size (L1/L2) (dual core processors have this listed twice)
• Installed memory size/speed and number of channels (single or
dual) (if applicable)
• Integrated MAC address for embedded, enabled NIC (if
applicable)
• System BIOS (includes family name and version)
• Chassis serial number
• Asset tracking number
About
Displays copyright notice.
Set Time and Date Allows you to set system time and date.
Flash System ROM Allows you to select a drive containing a new BIOS.
(some models)
Replicated Setup
Save to Removable Media
Saves system configuration, including CMOS, to a formatted
1.44-MB diskette, a USB flash media device, or a diskette-like
device (a storage device set to emulate a diskette drive).
Restore from Removable Media
Restores system configuration from a diskette, a USB flash media
device, or a diskette-like device.
Default Setup
Save Current Settings as Default
Saves the current system configuration settings as the default.
Restore Factory Settings as Default
Restores the factory system configuration settings as the default.
Apply Defaults
and Exit
Applies the currently selected default settings and clears any
established passwords.
Ignore Changes
and Exit
Exits Computer Setup without applying or saving any changes.
Save Changes and Saves changes to system configuration or default settings and exits
Exit Computer Setup.
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
✎
2–4
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Heading
Option
Device
Configuration
Description
Storage
Lists all installed BIOS-controlled storage devices.
When a device is selected, detailed information and options are
displayed. The following options may be presented.
Diskette Type (Legacy Diskettes only)
Identifies the highest capacity media type accepted by the diskette
drive.
Options are 3.5" 1.44 MB, and 5.25" 1.2 MB.
Drive Emulation
Allows you to select a drive emulation type for a certain storage
device. (For example, a Zip drive can be made bootable by
selecting diskette emulation.)
Drive Type
Emulation Options
ATAPI Zip drive
None (treated as Other)
Diskette (treated as diskette drive)
Hard disk
None (prevents BIOS data accesses and
disables it as a boot device)
Hard disk (treated as hard drive)
No emulation options available
No emulation options available
None (treated as Other).
Legacy diskette
CD-ROM drive
ATAPI LS-120
Diskette (treated as diskette drive).
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
✎
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
2–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Heading
Option
Description
Storage
(continued)
Device
Multisector Transfers (ATA disks only)
Configuration
Specifies how many sectors are transferred per multi-sector PIO
operation. Options (subject to device capabilities) are Disabled, 8,
and 16.
(continued)
Transfer Mode (IDE devices only)
Specifies the active data transfer mode. Options (subject to device
capabilities) are PIO 0, Max PIO, Enhanced DMA, Ultra DMA 0,
and Max UDMA.
Translation Mode (ATA disks only)
Lets you select the translation mode to be used for the device. This
enables the BIOS to access disks partitioned and formatted on other
systems and may be necessary for users of older versions of UNIX
(e.g., SCO UNIX version 3.2). Options are Automatic, Bit-Shift,
LBA Assisted, User, and None
CAUTION: Ordinarily, the translation mode selected
Ä
automatically by the BIOS should not be changed. If the selected
translation mode is not compatible with the translation mode that
was active when the disk was partitioned and formatted, the data
on the disk will be inaccessible.
Translation Parameters (ATA disks only)
This feature appears only when User translation mode is selected.
✎
Allows you to specify the parameters (logical cylinders, heads, and
sectors per track) used by the BIOS to translate disk I/O requests
(from the operating system or an application) into terms the hard
drive can accept. Logical cylinders may not exceed 1024. The
number of heads may not exceed 256. The number of sectors per
track may not exceed 63. These fields are only visible and
changeable when the drive translation mode is set to User.
Default Values IDE/SATA
Allows you to specify the default values for the Multisector Transfers,
Transfer Mode, and Translation Mode for ATA devices.
Storage Options
Removable Media Boot
Enables/disables ability to boot the system from removable media.
Legacy Diskette Write
Enables/disables ability to write data to legacy diskettes.
After saving changes to Removable Media Write, the computer
will restart. Turn the computer off, then on, manually.
✎
BIOS DMA Data Transfers
Allows you to control how BIOS device I/O requests are serviced.
When “Enable” is selected, the BIOS will service ATA device read
and write requests with DMA data transfers. When “Disable” is
selected, the BIOS will service ATA device read and write requests
with PIO data transfers.
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
✎
2–6
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Heading
Option
Description
Storage
(continued)
Storage Options
(continued)
SATA Emulation
Allows you to choose how the SATA controller and devices are
accessed by the operating system. There are up to three supported
options: IDE, RAID, and AHCI.
IDE is the default option. Use this option for “normal” (non-RAID,
non-AHCI) configurations.
Select the RAID option to enable DOS and boot accesses to RAID
volumes. Use this option for RAID configurations under Windows
2000, XP, or Vista with the appropriate RAID device driver.
The RAID device driver must be installed prior to attempting to
✎
boot from a RAID volume. If you attempt to boot from a RAID
volume without the required device driver installed, the system
will crash (blue screen). Also, do not select the RAID option while
the DriveLock feature is enabled on any attached hard drives.
Doing so will cause the DriveLocked drives to remain locked and
inaccessible during subsequent reboots until another SATA
emulation mode is selected.
Select the ACHI option to enable DOS and boot accesses to SATA
devices using the AHCI interface. Select this mode if the target
operating system supports accessing the SATA devices via AHCI
(e.g. Windows Vista) and AHCI accesses are desired.
Windows 2000 and Windows XP require a third-party device
✎
driver to access SATA devices using the AHCI interface. If you
attempt to boot with either of these operating systems in AHCI
mode without the required device driver, the system will crash
(blue screen).
SATA 0 and 2
Allows you to enable or disable DOS and boot accesses to the
Primary channel of the first SATA controller. This feature only applies
when SATA emulation = IDE.
Advanced operating systems like Windows may reenable the
channel.
✎
SATA 1 and 3
Allows you to enable or disable DOS and boot accesses to the
Secondary channel of the first SATA controller. This feature only
applies when SATA emulation = IDE.
Advanced operating systems like Windows may reenable the
channel.
✎
✎
DPS Self-Test
Allows you to execute self-tests on ATA hard drives capable of
performing the Drive Protection System (DPS) self-tests.
This selection will only appear when at least one drive capable of
performing the DPS self-tests is attached to the system.
✎
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
✎
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
2–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Heading
Option
Boot Order
Description
Storage
(continued)
Allows you to:
• Specify the order in which attached devices (such as a USB
flash media device, diskette drive, hard drive, optical drive, or
network interface card) are checked for a bootable operating
system image. Each device on the list may be individually
excluded from or included for consideration as a bootable
operating system source.
• Specify the order of attached hard drives. The first hard drive in
the order will have priority in the boot sequence and will be
recognized as drive C (if any devices are attached).
MS-DOS drive lettering assignments may not apply after a
non-MS-DOS operating system has started.
✎
Shortcut to Temporarily Override Boot Order
To boot one time from a device other than the default device
specified in Boot Order, restart the computer and press F9 when the
monitor light turns green. After POST is completed, a list of bootable
devices is displayed. Use the arrow keys to select the preferred
bootable device and press Enter. The computer then boots from the
selected non-default device for this one time.
Security
Smart Card
Options (some
models)
Allows you to enable/disable the Smart Card to be used in place of
the Power-On Password. This option only appears if a Smart Card
reader is attached to the system.
Setup Password
Allows you to set and enables setup (administrator) password.
If the setup password is set, it is required to change Computer
✎
Setup options, flash the ROM, and make changes to certain plug
and play settings under Windows.
Power-On
Password
Allows you to set and enable power-on password. The power-on
password prompt appears after a power cycle. If the user does not
enter the correct power-on password, the unit will not boot.
This password does not appear on warn boots, such as
✎
CTRL+ALT+DEL or Restart from Windows, unless enabled
in Password Options, below.
Password Options
(This selection will
appear only if a
power-on
password or setup
password is set.)
Allows you to:
• Lock legacy resources (appears if a setup password is set)
• Enable/disable network server mode (appears if a power-on
password is set)
• Specify whether the password is required for warm boot
(CTRL+ALT+DEL) (appears if a power-on password is set)
• Enable/Disable Setup Browse Mode (appears if a setup
password is set) (allows viewing, but not changing, the F10
Setup Options without entering setup password)
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
✎
2–8
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Heading
Option
Description
Security
(continued)
Smart Cover
(some models)
Allows you to:
• Lock/unlock the Cover Lock.
• Set the Cover Removal Sensor to Disable/Notify User/Setup
Password.
Notify User alerts the user that the sensor has detected that the
✎
cover has been removed. Setup Password requires that the setup
password be entered to boot the computer if the sensor detects
that the cover has been removed.
Embedded
Allows you to:
Security (This menu
only appears after
the Embedded
Security Device is
made available
under Device
• Enable/disable the Embedded Security device.
• Reset the device to Factory Settings.
• Enable/disable power-on authentication support (some
models).
• Reset authentication credentials (some models).
This feature is supported on some models only.
Security)
Device Security
Enables/disables serial ports, parallel port, all USB ports, system
audio, network controllers (some models), SMBus controller (some
models), and embedded security device (some models).
Network Service
Boot
Enables/disables the computer’s ability to boot from an operating
system installed on a network server. (Feature available on NIC
models only; the network controller must reside on the PCI bus or be
embedded on the system board.)
System IDs
Allows you to set:
• Asset tag (18-byte identifier) and ownership Tag (80-byte
identifier displayed during POST).
• Chassis serial number or Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)
number. The UUID can only be updated if the current chassis
serial number is invalid. (These ID numbers are normally set in
the factory and are used to uniquely identify the system.)
• Keyboard locale setting (for example, English or German) for
System ID entry.
DriveLock Security
Allows you to assign or modify a master or user password for hard
drives. When this feature is enabled, the user is prompted to
provide one of the DriveLock passwords during POST. If neither is
successfully entered, the hard drive will remain inaccessible until
one of the passwords is successfully provided during a subsequent
cold-boot sequence.
This selection will only appear when at least one drive that
✎
supports the DriveLock feature is attached to the system.
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
✎
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
2–9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Heading
Option
Description
This selection is in effect only if the processor and operating
system being used comprehend and utilize this feature.
Security
(continued)
OS Security
✎
• Data Execution Prevention (some models) (enable/disable).
Helps prevent OS security breaches.
• Intel Virtualization Technology (some models) (enable/disable).
Changing this setting requires turning the computer off and then
back on.
Power
OS Power
Management
• Runtime Power Management - Enable/Disable. Allows certain
operating systems to reduce processor voltage and frequency
when the current software load does not require the full
capabilities of the processor.
• Idle Power Savings - Extended/Normal. Allows certain
operating systems to decrease the processors power
consumption when the processor is idle.
• ACPI S3 Hard Disk Reset - Enabling this causes the BIOS to
ensure hard disks are ready to accept commands after
resuming from S3 before returning control to the operating
system.
• ACPI S3 PS2 Mouse Wakeup - Enables or disables waking from
S3 due to PS2 mouse activity.
• USB Wake on Device Insertion - Allows system to wake from
Standby on USB device insertion.
Hardware Power
Management
SATA power management enables or disables SATA bus and/or
device power management.
Thermal
Fan idle mode - This bar graph controls the minimum permitted fan
speed.
This setting only changes the minimum fan speed. The fans are
still automatically controlled.
✎
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
✎
2–10
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Heading
Option
Description
Advanced*
Power-On Options
Allows you to set:
*For
advanced
users only
• POST mode (QuickBoot, FullBoot, or FullBoot every 1-30 days).
• POST messages (enable/disable).
• MEBx Setup Prompt (enable/disable or hidden/displayed).
Enabling this feature displays the text CTRL+P=MEBx during
POST. Disabling this feature prevents the text from being
displayed. However, pressing CTRL+P still accesses the ME
BIOS Extension Setup Utility, which is used to configure
manageability settings.
• F9 prompt (enable/disable or hidden/displayed). Enabling
this feature will display the text F9=Boot Menu during POST.
Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed but
pressing F9 will still access the Shortcut Boot (Order) Menu
screen. See Storage > Boot Order for more information.
• F10 prompt (enable/disable or hidden/displayed). Enabling
this feature will display the text F10=Setup during POST.
Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed but
pressing F10 will still access the Setup screen.
• F12 prompt (enable/disable or hidden/displayed). Enabling
this feature will display the text F12=Network Service Boot
during POST. Disabling this feature prevents the text from being
displayed but pressing F12 will still force the system to attempt
booting from the network.
• Option ROM prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature
will cause the system to display a message before loading
options ROMs. (This feature is supported on some models only.)
• Remote wakeup boot source (remote server/local hard drive).
• After Power Loss (off/on/previous state): Setting this option to:
•Off - causes the computer to remain powered off when power
is restored.
•On - causes the computer to power on automatically as soon
as power is restored.
•On - allows you to power on the computer using a power strip
switch, if the computer is connected to an electric power strip.
•Previous state - causes the computer to power on automatically
as soon as power is restored, if it was on when power was
lost.
If you turn off power to your computer using the switch on a
power strip, you will not be able to use the suspend/sleep feature
or the Remote Management features.
✎
• POST Delay (None, 5, 10, 15, or 20 seconds)
(enable/disable). Enabling this feature will add a user-specified
delay to the POST process. This delay is sometimes needed for
hard disks on some PCI cards that spin up very slowly; so slowly
that they are not ready to boot by the time POST is finished. The
POST delay also gives you more time to press F10 to enter
Computer (F10) Setup.
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
✎
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
2–11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Heading
Option
Description
Allows you to set: (continued)
Advanced*
(continued)
*For
advanced
users only
Power-On Options
(continued)
• I/O APIC Mode (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will
allow Microsoft Windows Operating Systems to run optimally.
This feature must be disabled for certain non-Microsoft
Operating Systems to work properly.
• Hyper-threading (enable/disable)
• Limit CPUID Maximum Value to 3 - Restricts the number of
CPUID functions reported by the microprocessor. Enable this
feature if booting to WinNT.
Execute Memory
Test (some models)
Restarts the computer and executes the POST memory test.
BIOS Power-On
Onboard Devices
PCI Devices
Allows you to set the computer to turn on automatically at a time you
specify.
Allows you to set resources for or disable onboard system devices
(diskette controller, serial port, or parallel port).
• Lists currently installed PCI devices and their IRQ settings.
• Allows you to reconfigure IRQ settings for these devices or to
disable them entirely. These settings have no effect under an
APIC-based operating system.
PCI VGA
Configuration
Displayed only if there are multiple PCI video adapters in the
system. Allows you to specify which VGA controller will be the
“boot” or primary VGA controller.
In order to see this entry, you must enable integrated video
✎
(Advanced > Device Options) and Save Changes and
Exit.
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
✎
2–12
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Heading
Option
Description
Advanced*
Bus Options*
On some models, allows you to enable or disable:
• PCI SERR# Generation.
(continued)
*For
advanced
users only
• PCI VGA palette snooping, which sets the VGA palette
snooping bit in PCI configuration space; only needed when
more than one graphics controller is installed.
Device Options
Allows you to set:
• Printer mode (Bi-Directional, EPP & ECP, Output Only).
• Num Lock state at power-on (off/on).
• S5 Wake on LAN (enable/disable).
• To disable Wake on LAN during the off state (S5), use the arrow
(left and right) keys to select the Advanced > Device Options
menu and set the S5 Wake on LAN feature to “Disable.” This
obtains the lowest power consumption available on the computer
during S5. It does not affect the ability of the computer to Wake on
LAN from suspend or hibernation, but will prevent it from waking
from S5 via the network. It does not affect operation of the network
connection while the computer is on.
• If a network connection is not required, completely disable the
network controller (NIC) by using the arrow (left and right) keys to
select the Security > Device Security menu. Set the Network
Controller option to “Device Hidden.” This prevents the network
controller from being used by the operating system and reduces the
power used by the computer in S5.
• Processor cache (enable/disable).
• Unique Sleep State Blink Patterns. Allows you to choose an LED
blink pattern that uniquely identifies each sleep state.
•3 blinks followed by 2-sec. pause = S3
•4 blinks followed by 2-sec. pause = S4
• Integrated Video (enable/disable) Allows you to use integrated
video and PCI Up Solution video at the same time (available on
some models only).
After Integrated Video is enabled and changes saved, a new
✎
menu item appears under Advanced to allow you to select the
primary VGA controller video device.
Inserting a PCI or PCI Express video card automatically disables
Integrated Video. When PCI Express video is on, Integrated
Video must remain disabled.
• Internal speaker (some models) (enable/disable) (does not
affect external speakers)
• Monitor Tracking (enable/disable). Allows BIOS to save
monitor asset information.
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
✎
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
2–13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Heading
Option
Description
Advanced*
Device option
(continued)
• NIC PXE Option ROM Download (enable/disable). The BIOS
contains an embedded NIC option ROM to allow the unit to
boot through the network to a PXE server. This is typically used
to download a corporate image to a hard drive. The NIC
option ROM takes up memory space below 1MB commonly
referred to as DOS Compatibility Hole (DCH) space. This space
is limited. This F10 option will allow users to disable the
downloading of this embedded NIC option ROM thus giving
more DCH space for additional PCI cards which may need
option ROM space. The default will be to have the NIC option
ROM enabled.
(continued)
*For
advanced
users only
Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
✎
2.2.3 Recovering the Configuration Settings
This method of recovery requires that you first perform the Save to Removable Media command
with the Computer Setup (F10) Utility before Restore is needed.
It is recommended that you save any modified computer configuration settings to a diskette, a
USB flash media device, or a diskette-like device (a storage device set to emulate a diskette
drive) and save the diskette or device for possible future use.
✎
To restore the configuration, insert the diskette, USB flash media device, or other storage media
emulating a diskette with the saved configuration and perform the Restore from Removable
Media command with the Computer Setup (F10) Utility.
2.3 HP Insight Diagnostics
HP Insight Diagnostics is included on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD with some
computer models only.
✎
The HP Insight Diagnostics utility allows you to view information about the hardware
configuration of the computer and perform hardware diagnostic tests on the subsystems of the
computer. The utility simplifies the process of effectively identifying, diagnosing, and isolating
hardware issues.
The Survey tab is displayed when you invoke HP Insight Diagnostics. This tab shows the current
configuration of the computer. From the Survey tab, there is access to several categories of
information about the computer. Other tabs provide additional information, including diagnostic
test options and test results. The information in each screen of the utility can be saved as an html
file and stored on a diskette or USB HP Drive Key.
Use HP Insight Diagnostics to determine if all the devices installed on the computer are
recognized by the system and functioning properly. Running tests is optional but recommended
after installing or connecting a new device.
You should run tests, save the test results, and print them for reference.
Third party devices may not be detected by HP Insight Diagnostics.
✎
2–14
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
2.3.1 Accessing HP Insight Diagnostics
You must boot to the Documentation and Diagnostics CD, as described in the steps below, to
access HP Insight Diagnostics.
1. While the computer is on, insert the Documentation and Diagnostics CD into an optical drive
on the computer.
2. Shut down the operating system and turn off the computer.
3. Turn on the computer. The system will boot to the CD.
If the system does not boot to the CD in the optical drive, you may need to change the boot order
in the Computer Setup (F10) utility so that the system attempts to boot to the optical drive before
booting to the hard drive. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on the Documentation
and Diagnostics CD for more information.
✎
4. When prompted, press the y key if you want to operate in Safe mode or any other key if you
want to operate in Regular mode.
Regular mode is the default mode if no keys are pressed within the specified time frame. If the
screen remains blank after pressing any key other than y, try rebooting and select safe mode
when prompted.
✎
✎
5. Select the appropriate language and click Continue.
It is recommended that you accept the assigned default keyboard for your language unless you
want to test your specific keyboard.
6. In the End User License Agreement page, click Agree if you agree with the terms. The HP
Insight Diagnostics utility launches with the Survey tab displayed.
2.3.2 Survey Tab
The Survey tab displays important system configuration information. In the View section on the
left side of the screen, you can select the Summary view to see limited configuration data or
select the Advanced view to see all the data in the selected category. Regardless of whether you
choose Advanced or Summary, the following categories of information are available on the
Survey tab:
All—Gives a listing of all categories of information about the computer.
Overview—Gives you a listing of general information about the computer.
Architecture—Provides system BIOS and PCI device information.
Asset Control—Shows asset tag, system serial number, and processor information.
Communication—Shows information about the computer parallel (LPT) and serial (COM) port
settings, plus USB and network controller information.
Graphics—Shows information about the graphics controller of the computer.
Input Devices—Shows information about the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices
connected to the computer.
Memory—Shows information about all memory in the computer. This includes memory slots on
the system board and any memory modules installed.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
2–15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Miscellaneous—Shows information obtained from the computer configuration memory
(CMOS), system management BIOS data, system board data, and diagnostics component
information.
Storage—Shows information about storage media connected to the computer. This list includes
all fixed disks, diskette drives, and optical drives.
System—Shows information about the system board, processor, chassis, and BIOS, plus internal
speaker and PCI bus information.
2.3.3 Test Tab
The Test tab allows you to choose various parts of the system to test. You can also choose the
type of test and testing mode.
There are three types of tests to choose from:
■
Quick Test—Provides a predetermined script where a sample of each hardware component
is exercised and requires no user intervention in either Unattended or Interactive mode.
■
Complete Test—Provides a predetermined script where each hardware component is fully
tested. There are more tests available in the Interactive mode, but these require user
intervention.
■
Custom Test—Provides the most flexibility in controlling the testing of a system. The
Custom Test mode allows you to specifically select which devices, tests, and test parameters
are run.
There are two test modes to choose from:
■
Interactive Mode—Provides maximum control over the testing process. The diagnostic
software will prompt you for input during tests that require your interaction.You may also
determine whether the test passed or failed.
■
Unattended Mode—Does not display prompts and requires no interaction. If errors are
found, they are displayed when testing is complete.
To begin testing:
1. Select the Test tab.
2. Select the tab for the type of test to be run: Quick, Complete, or Custom.
3. Select the Test Mode: Interactive or Unattended.
4. Choose how you want the test to be executed, either Number of Loops or Total Test Time.
When choosing to run the test over a specified number of loops, enter the number of loops to
perform. If you desire to have the diagnostic test for a specified time period, enter the amount
of time in minutes.
5. If performing a Quick Test or Complete Test, select the device to be tested from the
drop-down list. If performing a Custom Test, click the Expand button and select the devices
to be tested or click the Check All button to select all devices.
6. Click Begin Testing to start the test. The Status tab, which allows you to monitor the
progress of the test, is automatically displayed during the testing process. When the test is
complete, the Status tab shows whether the device passed or failed.
7. If errors are found, go to the Log tab and click the Error Log to display more detailed
information and recommended actions.
2–16
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
2.3.4 Status Tab
The Status tab displays the status of the selected tests. The type of test executed (Quick,
Complete, or Custom) is also displayed. The main progress bar displays the percent complete of
the current set of tests. While testing is in progress, a Cancel Testing button is displayed for use
if you want to cancel the test.
After testing has completed, the Cancel Testing button is replaced with a Retest button. The
Retest button will retest the last set of tests executed. This enables you to re-run the set of tests
without having to re-enter the data in the Test tab.
The Status tab also shows:
■
■
■
■
■
The devices being tested
The test status (running, passed, or fail) of each device being tested
The overall test progress of all devices being tested
The test progress for each device being tested
The elapsed test times for each device being tested
2.3.5 Log Tab
The Log tab contains a Test Log and an Error Log tab.
The Test Log displays all tests that have been executed, the number of times of execution, the
number of times failed, and the time it took to complete each test. The Clear Test Log button
will clear the contents of the Test Log.
The Error Log displays the tests for devices that have failed during the diagnostic testing and
includes the following columns of information.
■
■
■
■
The Device section displays the device tested.
The Test section displays the type of test run.
The Description section describes the error that the diagnostic test found.
The Recommended Repair will give a recommended action that should be performed to
resolve the failed hardware.
■
■
The Failed Count is the number of times the test has failed.
The Error Code provides a numerical code for the failure. The error codes are defined in the
Help tab.
■
The Clear Error Log button will clear the contents of the Error Log.
2.3.6 Help Tab
The Help tab contains an HP Insight Diagnostics tab, an Error Codes tab, and a Test
Components tab.
The HP Insight Diagnostics tab contains help topics and includes search and index features.
The Error Codes tab provides a description of each numerical error code that may appear in the
Error Log tab located on the Log tab. Each code has a corresponding error Message and a
Recommended Repair action that should help solve the problem. To find an error code
description quickly, enter the code in the box at the top of the tab and click the Find Error
Codes button.
The Test Components tab displays low level information on tests that are run.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
2–17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
2.3.7 Saving and Printing Information in HP Insight Diagnostics
You can save the information displayed in the HP Insight Diagnostics Status and Log tabs to a
diskette or a USB 2.0 HP Drive Key (64MB or higher). You can not save to the hard drive. The
system will automatically create an html file that has the same appearance as the information
displayed on the screen.
1. Insert a diskette or USB 2.0 HP Drive Key (capacity must be 64MB or higher). USB 1.0
Drive Keys are not supported.
2. Click Save in the bottom right corner of the tab.
3. Select Save to the floppy or Save to USB key.
4. Enter a file name in the File Name box and click the Save button. An html file will be saved
to the inserted diskette or USB HP Drive Key.
Do not remove the diskette or Drive Key until you see a message indicating that the total file has
been written to the media.
✎
5. Print the information from the storage device used to save it.
To exit HP Insight Diagnostics, click the Exit Diagnostics button in the bottom left corner of the
screen then remove the Documentation and Diagnostics CD from the optical drive.
✎
2.3.8 Downloading the Latest Version of HP Insight Diagnostics
1. Go to www.hp.com.
2. Click the Software and Download driver link.
3. Enter the product number (for example, dc7700) in the text box and press the Enter key.
4. Select the specific product.
5. Select the OS.
6. Click the Diagnostics link.
7. Select HP Insight Diagnostics Offline Edition.
8. Select the proper language and click Download.
The download includes instructions on how to create the bootable CD.
✎
2–18
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Desktop Management
HP Client Management Solutions provides standards-based solutions for managing and
controlling desktops, workstations, and notebook PCs in a networked environment.
The key capabilities and features of desktop management are:
■
■
■
■
■
■
Initial configuration and deployment
Remote system installation
Software updating and management
ROM flash
Asset tracking and security
Fault notification and recovery
Support for specific features described in this guide may vary by model or software version.
✎
3.1 Initial Configuration and Deployment
HP computers come with a preinstalled system software image. After a brief software
“unbundling” process, the computer is ready to be used.
A customized software image may be deployed by:
■
■
Installing additional software applications after unbundling the preinstalled software image.
Using software deployment tools, such as HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager, HP
OpenView PC Configuration Management Solutions, or Altiris Deployment Solution, to
replace the preinstalled software with a customized software image.
■
Using a disk cloning process to copy the contents from one hard drive to another.
The best deployment method depends on your information technology environment and
processes. The PC Deployment section of the HP Lifecycle Solutions Web site
(http://h20219.www2.hp.com/services/cache/80906-0-0-225-121.html) provides information to
help you select the best deployment method.
The Restore Plus! CD, ROM-based setup, and ACPI hardware provide further assistance with
recovery of system software, configuration management and troubleshooting, and power
management.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
3–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
3.1.1 HP OpenView Agent
The Radia Management Agent (RMA) used by both HP OpenView Client Configuration
Manager and HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solutions (Radia) is pre-loaded on
the computer. When installed, it enables communication with the HP OpenView management
console.
To install the Radia Management Agent:
1. Click Start.
2. Click All Programs.
3. Click HP Manageability.
4. Click Radia Management Agent Readme.
5. Review and follow the instructions contained in the Readme file to install the Radia
Management Agent.
3.1.2 Altiris Deployment Solution Agent
This program is pre-loaded on the computer. When installed, it enables communication with the
administrator Deployment Solution console.
To install Altiris Deployment Solution Agent:
1. Click Start.
2. Click All Programs.
3. Click Software Setup.
4. Click Next.
5. Scroll down and click on the link to install Altiris AClient.
3.1.3 HP Backup and Recovery Manager
HP Backup and Recovery Manager can create the Restore Plus! CD set. This set includes the
Restore Plus! CD, the Operating system CD, and any Supplemental Software CDs.
CAUTION: The Restore Plus! CD set will not include and system settings or user data created after the
initial system setup.
Ä
To create the Restore Plus! CD set:
1. Click Start > HP Backup and Recovery > HP Backup and Recovery Manager to open
the Backup and Recovery Wizard, then click Next.
2. Select Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system.
3. Follow the instructions in the wizard.
In addition to allowing you to create the Restore Plus! CD set, HP Backup and Recovery
Manager can be used to back up data and system files to the hard drive, to network drives, or to
removable media, such as CDs, DVDs, or flash media. If data or system files are lost, deleted, or
corrupted, Backup and Recovery Manager allows you to retrieve data or restore the last good
system image.
3–2
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
You can order a Recovery Disc Set from HP by calling the HP suport center. Go to the following
Web site, select your region, and click the Technical support after you buy link under the Call
HP heading to obtain the support center telephone number for your region.
http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html
3.2 Remote System Installation
Remote System Installation allows you to start and set up your system using the software and
configuration information located on a network server by initiating the Preboot Execution
Environment (PXE). The Remote System Installation feature is usually used as a system setup
and configuration tool, and can be used for the following tasks:
■
■
■
Formatting a hard drive.
Deploying a software image on one or more new PCs.
Remotely updating the system BIOS in flash ROM. See Section 3.4.1, “Remote ROM
Flash.”
■
Configuring the system BIOS settings.
To initiate Remote System Installation, press F12 when the F12 = Network Service Boot
message appears in the lower-right corner of the HP logo screen. Follow the instructions on the
screen to continue the process. The default boot order is a BIOS configuration setting that can be
changed to always attempt to PXE boot.
3.3 Software Updating and Management
HP provides several tools for managing and updating software on desktops, workstations, and
notebooks:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
HP System Software Manager
HP Client Manager
HP ProtectTools Security Manager
HP Client Premium Suite
HP Client Foundation Suite
HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager
HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solutions
HP Proactive Change Notification
HP Subscriber's Choice
3.3.1 HP Client Management Interface
HP Client Management Interface (HP CMI) provides an interface to simplify the integration of
business computers with popular industry system management tools (including Microsoft
Systems Management Server, IBM Tivoli Software, and HP OpenView Operations) and custom
inhouse developed management applications. Using HP CMI, systems management tools and
applications can request in-depth client inventory, receive health status information, and manage
system BIOS settings by communicating directly with the client computer, reducing the need for
agent or connector software to achieve integration.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
3–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
When HP Client Management Interface is used in conjunction with system management
software, it can:
■
Request in-depth client inventory information - Capture detailed information about the
processors, hard drives, memory, BIOS, drivers, and sensor information (such as fan speed,
voltage, and temperature)
■
Receive health status information - Subscribe for a wide range of client hardware alerts (such
as over-temperature, fan stall, and hardware configuration changes) to be sent to the system
management console, application, or to the local client computer. Alerts are sent real-time
when triggered by hardware events.
■
Manage system BIOS settings - Perform F10 functions including setting and changing the
BIOS passwords and computer boot order remotely from the system management console of
any or all of the client systems without having to visit each machine.
3.3.2 HP System Software Manager
HP System Software Manager (SSM) is a free utility that automates remote deployment of
device drivers and BIOS updates for networked HP business PCs. When SSM runs, it silently
(without user interaction) determines the revision levels of drivers and BIOS installed on each
networked client system and compares this inventory against system software SoftPaqs that have
been tested and stored in a central file store. SSM then automatically updates any down-revision
system software on the networked PCs to the later levels available in the file store. Since SSM
only allows distribution of SoftPaq updates to the correct client system models, administrators
can confidently and efficiently use SSM to keep system software updated.
System Software Manager integrates with enterprise software distribution tools such as
Microsoft Systems Management Server (SMS). Using SSM, you can distribute customer-created
or third-party updates that have been packaged in the SSM-format.
SSM may be downloaded at no charge by visiting www.hp.com/go/ssm.
3.3.3 HP Client Manager
HP Client Manager, developed with Altiris, is available free for supported HP business desktop,
notebook, and workstation models. SSM is integrated into HP Client Manager and enables
central tracking, monitoring, and management of the hardware aspects of HP client systems.
Use HP Client Manager to:
■
■
■
■
■
Get valuable hardware information such as CPU, memory, video, and security settings
Monitor system health to fix problems before they occur
Automatically acquire and install drivers and BIOS updates without visiting each PC
Remotely configure BIOS and security settings
Automate processes to quickly resolve hardware problems
Tight integration with HP Instant Support tools reduces hardware troubleshooting time.
■
■
■
Diagnostics—remotely run & view reports on HP desktop, notebook, and workstation
models
System Health Scan—check for known hardware issues in your installed base of HP client
systems
Active Chat—connect to HP customer support to resolve issues
3–4
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
■
■
■
■
■
HP Knowledgebase—link to expert information
Automated SoftPaq collection and delivery process for fast resolution of hardware problems
Identify, inventory, and initialize systems with HP ProtectTools embedded security chip
Option for health alerts to display locally on the client system
Report basic inventory information for non-HP clients
For more information on HP Client Manager, visit www.hp.com/go/clientmanager.
3.3.4 HP ProtectTools Security Manager
ProtectTools Security Manager software provides security features that help protect against
unauthorized access to the computer, networks, and critical data. Enhanced security functionality
is provided by the following modules:
■
■
■
■
Smart Card Security for ProtectTools
Embedded Security for ProtectTools
BIOS Configuration for ProtectTools
Credential Manager for ProtectTools
The modules available for your computer may vary depending on your model. For example,
Embedded Security for ProtectTools requires that the Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
embedded security chip (some models only) be installed on your computer, and Smart Card
Security for ProtectTools requires an optional smart card and reader.
ProtectTools modules may be preinstalled, preloaded, or available for purchase from the HP Web
site. Visit http://www.hp.com/products/security for more information.
3.3.5 HP Client Premium Suite
HP Client Premium Suite (HP CPS) is designed for organizations wanting full client hardware
and software lifecycle management from a single, Web-based management console. It combines:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
HP Client Manager
HP Systems Insight Manager Connector
HP OpenView Connector
Altiris Client Management Suite - Level 1
Altiris Connector Solution
Altiris Local Recovery Pro
Altiris AuditExpress
For more information on HP Client Management Premium Suite, visit
http://www.hp.com/go/easydeploy.
3.3.6 HP Client Foundation Suite
The HP Client Foundation Suite (HP CFS) is designed for organizations wanting essential client
management functionality. It combines:
■
■
HP Client Manager
HP Systems Insight Manager Connector
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
3–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
■
■
Altiris Migration Suite
Altiris Local Recovery Pro
For more information about the HP Client Foundation Suite, visit
http://www.hp.com/go/easydeploy.
3.3.7 HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager
HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager is a simplified, out-of-the-box, and easy-to-use
solution that solves immediate PC software configuration management needs.
■
Integrated software management
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Inventory collection
Operating system deployment and settings migration
Patch management
Software distribution
Software usage metering
■
Integrated hardware management
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Remote control
HP alert monitoring
HP hardware driver and BIOS updates
Integration with HP ProtectTools
Free add-on support for Intel Active Management Technology (AMT)
Free version for basic hardware management of HP desktops and notebooks, and
software and hardware management for HP Thin Clients.
For more information about the HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager, visit
http://www.managementsoftware.hp.com/products/ccm/index.html.
3.3.8 HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solutions
HP OpenView Configuration Management solutions automate the management of software such
as operating systems, applications, patches, content, and configuration settings to ensure that
each computing device is maintained in the right configuration.
Proven across enterprises of every size and complexity, HP’s adaptive, policy-based model for
software Configuration Management, automates the entire software lifecycle management
process - from discovery, deployment, and ongoing management through to migration and
retirement.
By substituting automation for manual intervention, HP helps its customers lower costs,
significantly reduce software related problems, and ensure the software supporting their business
operations is reliable and secure.
For more information on HP OpenView PC Configuration Management Solution, visit
http://h20229.www2.hp.com/solutions/ascm/index.html.
3–6
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
3.3.9 Intel vPro-branded PCs with Active Management
Technology
Intel Active Management Technology (AMT) allows better discovery, healing, and protection of
networked computing assets. With AMT, PCs can be managed whether the system is on, off, or
the operating system is hung.
Intel vPro features include:
■
■
■
■
Hardware inventory information
Alerting
Power management—power on/off, cycle power
Remote diagnosis and repair
❏
❏
Serial-over-LAN—allows console control of remote PC
IDE-Redirect—allows system booting from a remote boot drive, disk, or ISO image
■
Hardware-based isolation and recovery—limit or cut off PC network access, if virus-like
activity is detected
For an overview of Intel vPro technology, visit http://www.intel.com/vpro.
✎
For HP-specific information on Intel vPro technology, see the white papers at
http://www.hp.com/support. Select your country and language, select See support and
troubleshooting information, enter the model number of the computer, and press Enter. In
the Resources category, click Manuals (guides, supplements, addendums, etc). Under
Quick jump to manuals by category, click White papers.
On Intel vPro-branded PCs, available management technologies include the following:
■
■
■
AMT
ASF
Virtualization Technology (VT)
ASF and AMT may not be configured at the same time, but both are supported.
To configure Intel vPro systems for AMT or ASF:
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Microsoft Windows, click Start > Shut Down
> Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press the hot key, Ctrl+P, when the monitor light turns
green.
NOTE If you do not press Ctrl+P at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and
again press Ctrl+P when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
✎
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
3–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
This hot-key enters the Intel Management Engine BIOS Execution (ME Bx) setup utility. This
utility allows the user to configure various aspects of the management technology. Configuration
options include:
■
ME Platform Configuration
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
ME Platform State Control—enable/disable management engine
ME Firmware Local Update—local enable/disable management of firmware updates
LAN Controller—enable/disable integrated network controller
ME Features Control—enable AMT, ASF, or none
ME Power Control—configure management engine power policies
■
Intel AMT Configuration
❏
Change AMT Password—required in order to configure AMT (the default password is
admin)
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Host Name—allows administrator to assign a name to the client
TCP/IP—allows administrator to assign an IP address or enable DHCP
Provisioning Server—allows administrator to assign IP address of provisioning server
Provision Model—allows administrator to configure either enterprise or SMB mode
Set PID and PPS—allows administrator to provide pre-provisioning key (see HP’s white
paper, Intel vPro Provisioning)
❏
❏
❏
Un-Provision—allows administrator to reset AMT configuration to factory defaults
VLAN—allows administrator to enable LAN virtualization support
SOL/IDE-R—allows administrator to enable remote boot and control sessions
■
Change MEBx Password (HP highly recommends that this password be changed. The
default password is admin.)
In order to remotely manage AMT systems, the administrator must use a remote console that
supports AMT. Enterprise management consoles are available from suppliers such as HP
OpenView, Altiris and Microsoft SMS. In SMB mode, the client provides a Web browser
interface. To access this feature, open a browser from any other system on the network and enter
http://host_name:16992 where host_name is the name assigned to the system.
Alternatively, the IP address may be used in place of the host name.
3.3.10 Proactive Change Notification
The Proactive Change Notification program uses the Subscriber's Choice Web site in order to
proactively and automatically:
■
Send you Proactive Change Notification (PCN) e-mails informing you of hardware and
software changes to most commercial computers and servers, up to 60 days in advance
■
Send you e-mail containing Customer Bulletins, Customer Advisories, Customer Notes,
Security Bulletins, and Driver alerts for most commercial computers and servers
You create your own profile to ensure that you only receive the information relevant to a specific
IT environment. To learn more about the Proactive Change Notification program and create a
custom profile, visit http://h30046.www3.hp.com/subhub.php.
3–8
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
3.3.11 Subscriber’s Choice
Subscriber’s Choice is a client-based service from HP.
Based on your profile, HP will supply you with personalized product tips, feature articles, and/or
driver and support alerts/notifications.
Subscriber’s Choice Driver and Support Alerts/Notifications will deliver e-mails notifying you
that the information you subscribed to in your profile is available for review and retrieval. To
learn more about Subscriber’s Choice and create a custom profile, visit
http://h30046.www3.hp.com/subhub.php.
3.3.12 Retired Solutions
Two software packages, Altiris Local Recovery, and Dantz Retrospect, will no longer be
shipping on HP business desktops, notebooks, or workstations. Starting with new business
desktops, notebooks, and workstations released in 2006, all will ship with HP Backup and
Recovery Manager.
3.4 ROM Flash
The computer's BIOS is stored in a programmable flash ROM (read only memory). By
establishing a setup password in the Computer Setup (F10) Utility, you can protect the ROM
from being unintentionally updated or overwritten. This is important to ensure the operating
integrity of the computer. Should you need or want to upgrade the BIOS, you may download the
latest BIOS images from the HP driver and support page:
http:\\h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
CAUTION: For maximum ROM protection, be sure to establish a setup password. The setup password
prevents unauthorized ROM upgrades. System Software Manager allows the system administrator to set
the setup password on one or more PCs simultaneously. For more information, visit
http://www.hp.com/go/ssm.
3.4.1 Remote ROM Flash
Remote ROM Flash allows the system administrator to safely upgrade the ROM on remote HP
computers directly from the centralized network management console. Enabling the system
administrator to perform this task remotely on multiple computers results in a consistent
deployment of, and greater control over, HP PC BIOS images over the network. It also results in
greater productivity and lower total cost of ownership.
The computer must be powered on, or turned on through Remote Wakeup, to take advantage of
Remote ROM Flash.
✎
For more information on Remote ROM Flash, refer to the HP Client Manager or System
Software Manager at http://h18000.www1.hp.com/im/prodinfo.html.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
3–9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
3.4.2 HPQFlash
The HPQFlash utility is used to locally update or restore the system BIOS on individual PCs
through a Windows operating system.
For more information on HPQFlash, visit http://www.hp.com/support/files and enter the product
name/number of the computer when prompted.
3.4.3 Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode
Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode permits system recovery in the unlikely event of a ROM
flash failure. For example, if a power failure were to occur during a BIOS upgrade, the ROM
flash would be incomplete. This would render the system BIOS unusable. The Boot Block is a
flash-protected section of the ROM that contains code that checks for a valid system BIOS image
when the system is turned on.
■
■
If the system BIOS image is valid, the system starts normally.
If the system BIOS image is not valid, a failsafe Boot Block BIOS provides enough
support to search removable media for BIOS image files. If an appropriate BIOS image file
is found, it is automatically flashed into the ROM.
When an invalid system BIOS image is detected, the system power LED will blink red 8 times,
one blink every second. Simultaneously, the speaker will beep 8 times. If the portion of the
system ROM containing the video option ROM image is not corrupt, “Boot Block Emergency
Recovery Mode” will be displayed on the screen.
To recover the system after it enters Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode, complete the
following steps:
1. Turn off the power.
2. Insert a diskette, CD, or USB flash device containing the desired BIOS image file in the root
directory.
Note: The media must be formatted using the FAT12, FAT16, or FAT32 file system.
✎
3. Turn on the computer.
If the system successfully reprograms the ROM, the system will automatically power off.
4. Remove the removable media used to upgrade the BIOS.
5. Turn the power on to restart the computer.
3–10
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
3.4.4 Replicating the Setup
The following procedures give an administrator the ability to easily copy one setup configuration
to other computers of the same model. This allows for faster, more consistent configuration of
multiple computers.
Both procedures require a diskette drive or a supported USB flash media device, such as an HP
Drive Key.
✎
Copying to Single Computer
CAUTION: A setup configuration is model-specific. File system corruption may result if source and target
computers are not the same model. For example, do not copy the setup configuration from a dc7nnn PC
to a dx7nnn PC.
Ä
1. Select a setup configuration to copy. Turn off the computer. If you are in Windows, click
Start > Shut Down > Shut Down.
2. If you are using a USB flash media device, insert it now.
3. Turn on the computer.
4. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
✎
5. If you are using a a diskette, insert it now.
6. Select File > Replicated Setup > Save to Removable Media. Follow the instructions on the
screen to create the configuration diskette or USB flash media device.
7. Turn off the computer to be configured and insert the configuration diskette or USB flash
media device.
8. Turn on the computer to be configured.
9. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
10. Select File > Replicated Setup > Restore from Removable Media, and follow the
instructions on the screen.
11. Restart the computer when the configuration is complete.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
3–11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
Copying to Multiple Computers
CAUTION: A setup configuration is model-specific. File system corruption may result if source and target
computers are not the same model. For example, do not copy the setup configuration from a dc7nnn PC
to a dx7nnn PC.
Ä
✎
Ä
This method takes a little longer to prepare the configuration diskette or USB flash media device,
but copying the configuration to target computers is significantly faster.
A bootable diskette is required for this procedure or to create a bootable USB flash media device.
If Windows XP is not available to use to create a bootable diskette, use the method for copying to
a single computer instead (see “Copying to Single Computer”).
1. Create a bootable diskette or USB flash media device. See “Supported USB Flash Media
Device” or “Unsupported USB Flash Media Device.”
CAUTION: Not all computers can be booted from a USB flash media device. If the default boot order in
the Computer Setup (F10) Utility lists the USB device before the hard drive, the computer can be booted
from a USB flash media device. Otherwise, a bootable diskette must be used.
2. Select a setup configuration to copy. Turn off the computer. If you are in Windows, click
Start > Shut Down > Shut Down.
3. If you are using a USB flash media device, insert it now.
4. Turn on the computer.
5. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
✎
6. If you are using a diskette, insert it now.
7. Select File > Replicated Setup > Save to Removable Media. Follow the instructions on the
screen to create the configuration diskette or USB flash media device.
8. Download a BIOS utility for replicating setup (repset.exe) and copy it onto the configuration
diskette or USB flash media device. To obtain this utility, go to http://www.hp.com, click
Software and Driver Downloads, and enter the model number of the computer.
9. On the configuration diskette or USB flash media device, create an autoexec.bat file
containing the following command:
repset.exe
10. Turn off the computer to be configured. Insert the configuration diskette or USB flash media
device and turn the computer on. The configuration utility will run automatically.
11. Restart the computer when the configuration is complete.
3–12
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
Creating a Bootable Device
Supported USB Flash Media Device
Supported devices have a preinstalled image to simplify the process of making them bootable.
All HP or Compaq and most other USB flash media devices have this preinstalled image. If the
USB flash media device being used does not have this image, use the procedure later in this
section (see “Unsupported USB Flash Media Device”).
To create a bootable USB flash media device, you must have:
■
■
A supported USB flash media device.
A bootable DOS diskette with the FDISK and SYS programs. (If SYS is not available,
FORMAT may be used, but all existing files on the USB flash media device will be lost.)
■
A PC that is bootable from a USB flash media device.
CAUTION: Some older PCs may not be bootable from a USB flash media device. If the default boot
order in the Computer Setup (F10) Utility lists the USB device before the hard drive, the computer can be
booted from a USB flash media device. Otherwise, a bootable diskette must be used.
Ä
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Insert the USB flash media device into one of the computer’s USB ports and remove all other
USB storage devices except USB diskette drives.
3. Insert a bootable DOS diskette with FDISK.COM and either SYS.COM or FORMAT.COM
into a diskette drive and turn on the computer to boot to the DOS diskette.
4. Run FDISK from the A:\ prompt by typing FDISK and pressing Enter. If prompted, click Yes
(Y) to enable large disk support.
5. Enter Choice [5] to display the drives in the system. The USB flash media device will be the
drive that closely matches the size of one of the drives listed. It will usually be the last drive
in the list. Note the letter of the drive.
USB flash media device drive: __________
CAUTION: If a drive does not match the USB flash media device, do not proceed. Data loss can occur.
Check all USB ports for additional storage devices. If any are found, remove them, reboot the computer,
and proceed from step 4. If none are found, either the system does not support the USB flash media
device or the USB flash media device is defective. DO NOT proceed in attempting to make the USB flash
media device bootable.
Ä
6. Exit FDISK by pressing the Esc key to return to the A:\ prompt.
7. If your bootable DOS diskette contains SYS.COM, go to step 8. Otherwise, go to step 9.
8. At the A:\ prompt, enter SYS x: where x represents the drive letter noted above.
ÄCAUTION: Be sure that you have entered the correct drive letter for the USB flash media device.
After the system files have been transferred, SYS will return to the A:\ prompt. Go to
step 13.
9. Copy any files you want to keep from your USB flash media device to a temporary directory
on another drive (for example, the system's internal hard drive).
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
3–13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
10. At the A:\ prompt, enter FORMAT /S X: where X represents the drive letter noted before.
ÄCAUTION: Be sure that you have entered the correct drive letter for the USB flash media device.
FORMAT will display one or more warnings and ask you each time whether you want to
proceed. Enter Y each time. FORMAT will format the USB flash media device, add the
system files, and ask for a Volume Label.
11. Press Enter for no label or enter one if desired.
12. Copy any files you saved in step 9 back to your USB flash media device.
13. Remove the diskette and reboot the computer. The computer will boot to the USB flash
media device as drive C.
The default boot order varies from computer to computer, and it can be changed in the Computer
Setup (F10) Utility.
✎
If you have used a DOS version from Windows 9x, you may see a brief Windows logo screen. If
you do not want this screen, add a zero-length file named LOGO.SYS to the root directory of the
USB flash media device.
Return to “Copying to Multiple Computers.”
Unsupported USB Flash Media Device
To create a bootable USB flash media device, you must have:
■
■
USB flash media device.
Bootable DOS diskette with the FDISK and SYS programs. (If SYS is not available,
FORMAT may be used, but all existing files on the USB flash media device will be lost.)
■
PC that is bootable from a USB flash media device.
CAUTION: Some older PCs may not be bootable from a USB flash media device. If the default boot
order in the Computer Setup (F10) Utility lists the USB device before the hard drive, the computer can be
booted from a USB flash media device. Otherwise, a bootable diskette must be used.
Ä
1. If there are any PCI cards in the system that have SCSI, ATA RAID, or SATA drives
attached, turn off the computer and unplug the power cord.
ÄCAUTION: The power cord MUST be unplugged.
2. Open the computer and remove the PCI cards.
3. Insert the USB flash media device into one of the computer's USB ports and remove all other
USB storage devices except USB diskette drives. Close the computer cover.
4. Plug in the power cord and turn on the computer.
5. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
✎
3–14
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
6. Go to Advanced > PCI Devices to disable both the PATA and SATA controllers. When
disabling the SATA controller, note the IRQ to which the controller is assigned. You will
need to reassign the IRQ later. Exit setup, confirming the changes.
SATA IRQ: __________
7. Insert a bootable DOS diskette with FDISK.COM and either SYS.COM or FORMAT.COM
into a diskette drive and turn on the computer to boot to the DOS diskette.
8. Run FDISK and delete any existing partitions on the USB flash media device. Create a new
partition and mark it active. Exit FDISK by pressing the Esc key.
9. If the system did not automatically restart when exiting FDISK, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to
reboot to the DOS diskette.
10. At the A:\ prompt, type FORMAT C: /S and press Enter. Format will format the USB flash
media device, add the system files, and ask for a Volume Label.
11. Press Enter for no label or enter one if desired.
12. Turn off the computer and unplug the power cord. Open the computer and re-install any PCI
cards that were previously removed. Close the computer cover.
13. Plug in the power cord, remove the diskette, and turn on the computer.
14. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
15. Go to Advanced > PCI Devices and re-enable the PATA and SATA controllers that were
disabled in step 6. Put the SATA controller on its original IRQ.
16. Save the changes and exit. The computer will boot to the USB flash media device as drive C.
The default boot order varies from computer to computer, and it can be changed in the Computer
Setup (F10) Utility. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on the Documentation and
Diagnostics CD for instructions.
✎
If you have used a DOS version from Windows 9x, you may see a brief Windows logo screen. If
you do not want this screen, add a zero-length file named LOGO.SYS to the root directory of the
USB flash media device.
Return to “Copying to Multiple Computers.”
3.4.5 Dual-State Power Button
With Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) enabled, the power button can
function either as an on/off switch or as a standby button. The stand-by feature does not
completely turn off power, but instead causes the computer to enter a low-power standby state.
This allows you to power down quickly without closing applications and to return quickly to the
same operational state without any data loss.
To change the power button’s configuration, complete the following steps:
1. Left click on the Start Button, then select Control Panel > Power Options.
2. In the Power Options Properties, select the Advanced tab.
3. In the Power Button section, select Stand by.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
3–15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
After configuring the power button to function as a standby button, press the power button to put
the system in a very low power state (standby). Press the button again to quickly bring the system
out of standby to full power status. To completely turn off all power to the system, press and hold
the power button for four seconds.
CAUTION: Do not use the power button to turn off the computer unless the system is not responding;
turning off the power without operating system interaction could cause damage to or loss of data on the
hard drive.
Ä
3.4.6 HP Web Site Support
When making the transition to new or revised operating systems, it is important to implement the
support software designed for that operating system. If you plan to run a version of Microsoft
Windows that is different from the version included with the computer, you must install
corresponding device drivers and utilities to ensure that all features are supported and
functioning properly.
HP has made the task of locating, accessing, evaluating, and installing the latest support software
easier. You can download the software from http://www.hp.com/support.
The Web site contains the latest device drivers, utilities, and flashable ROM images needed to
run the latest Microsoft Windows operating system on the HP computer.
3.4.7 Industry Standards
HP management solutions integrate with other systems management applications, and are based
on industry standards, such as:
■
■
■
■
■
■
Web-Based Enterprise Management (WBEM)
Windows Management Interface (WMI)
Wake on LAN Technology
ACPI
SMBIOS
Pre-boot Execution (PXE) support
3.5 Asset Tracking and Security
Asset tracking features incorporated into the computer provide key asset tracking data that can be
managed using HP Systems Insight Manager, HP Client Manager or other system management
applications. Seamless, automatic integration between asset tracking features and these products
enables you to choose the management tool that is best suited to the environment and to leverage
the investment in existing tools.
HP also offers several solutions for controlling access to valuable components and information.
HP Embedded Security for ProtectTools, if installed, prevents unauthorized access to data and
checks system integrity and authenticates third-party users attempting system access. (For more
information, refer to the HP ProtectTools Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com.) Security
features such as HP Embedded Security for ProtectTools, the Smart Cover Sensor and the Smart
Cover Lock, available on some models, help to prevent unauthorized access to the internal
components of the personal computer. By disabling parallel, serial, or USB ports, or by disabling
3–16
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
removable media boot capability, you can protect valuable data assets. Memory Change and
Smart Cover Sensor alerts can be automatically forwarded to system management applications to
deliver proactive notification of tampering with a computer’s internal components.
HP Embedded Security for ProtectTools, the Smart Cover Sensor, and the Smart Cover Lock are
available as options on some systems.
✎
Use the following utilities to manage security settings on the HP computer:
■
■
Locally, using the Computer Setup Utilities. See the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on
the Documentation and Diagnostics CD included with the computer for additional
information and instructions on using the Computer Setup Utilities. Some computers also
have HP BIOS Configuration for ProtectTools, which is a Windows-based component of
ProtectTools that allows administrators to configure BIOS security settings from within the
running OS.
Remotely, using HP Client Manager Software or System Software Manager. This software
enables the secure, consistent deployment and control of security settings from a simple
command-line utility.
The following table and sections refer to managing security features of the computer locally
through the Computer Setup (F10) Utilities.
Security Features Overview
Option
Setup Password
Description
Allows you to set and enable setup (administrator) password.
If the setup password is set, it is required to change
✎
Computer Setup options, flash the ROM, and make changes
to certain plug and play settings under Windows.
Power-On Password
Password Options
(This selection will appear only
if a power-on password is set.)
Allows you to set and enable power-on password.
Allows you to specify whether the password is required for
warm boot (CTRL+ALT+DEL) (appears if a power-on
password is set).
Pre-Boot Authorization
Allows you to enable/disable the Smart Card to be used in
place of the Power-On Password.
Smart Cover
Allows you to:
• Enable/disable the Cover Lock.
• Enable/disable the Cover Removal Sensor.
Notify User alerts the user that the sensor has detected that
✎
the cover has been removed. Setup Password requires that
the setup password be entered to boot the computer if the
sensor detects that the cover has been removed.
This feature is supported on some models only and will only
appear if a Smart Card reader is attached to the system.
Embedded Security
Allows you to:
• Enable/disable the Embedded Security device.
• Reset the device to Factory Settings.
For more information about Computer Setup, see the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Support for security features may vary depending on your specific computer configuration.
✎
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
3–17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
Security Features Overview (Continued)
Option
Device Security
Description
Enables/disables serial ports, parallel port, front USB ports,
system audio, network controllers (some models), and SCSI
controllers (some models).
Network Service Boot
System IDs
Enables/disables the computer’s ability to boot from an
operating system installed on a network server. (Feature
available on NIC models only; the network controller must
reside on the PCI bus or be embedded on the system board.)
Allows you to set:
• Asset tag (18-byte identifier) and ownership Tag (80-byte
identifier displayed during POST).
• Chassis serial number or Universal Unique Identifier
(UUID) number. The UUID can only be updated if the
current chassis serial number is invalid. (These ID numbers
are normally set in the factory and are used to uniquely
identify the system.)
• Keyboard locale setting (for example, English or German)
for System ID entry.
DriveLock (some models)
Allows you to assign or modify a master or user password for
certain ATA hard drives. When this feature is enabled, the user
is prompted to provide one of the DriveLock passwords during
POST. If neither is successfully entered, the hard drive will
remain inaccessible until one of the passwords is successfully
provided during a subsequent cold-boot sequence.
This selection will only appear when at least one drive that
supports ATA Security is attached to the system.
✎
For more information about Computer Setup, see the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Support for security features may vary depending on your specific computer configuration.
✎
3–18
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
Mechanical Security Features
Feature
Purpose
How It Is Established
Memory Change Alerts
Detects when memory modules This feature is automatic.
have been added, moved, or
removed; notifies user and
system administrator.
Cable Lock Provision
Inhibits access to the interior of Install a cable lock to secure
the computer to prevent
unwanted configuration
changes or component
the computer to a fixed
object.
removal. Can also be used to
secure the computer to a fixed
object to prevent theft.
Security Loop Provision
Inhibits access to the interior of Install a lock in the security
the computer to prevent
unwanted configuration
changes or component
removal.
loop to prevent unwanted
configuration changes or
component removal.
3.5.1 Password Security
The power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the computer by requiring entry of a
password to access applications or data each time the computer is turned on or restarted. The
setup password specifically prevents unauthorized access to Computer Setup, and can also be
used as an override to the power-on password. That is, when prompted for the power-on
password, entering the setup password instead will allow access to the computer.
A network-wide setup password can be established to enable the system administrator to log in to
all network systems to perform maintenance without having to know the power-on password,
even if one has been established.
3.5.2 Establishing a Setup Password Using Computer Setup
If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools
Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com. Establishing a setup password through Computer
Setup prevents reconfigration of the computer (use of the Computer Setup (F10) utility) until the
password is entered.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
✎
3. Select Security, then select Setup Password and follow the instructions on the screen.
4. Before exiting, Select File > Save Changes and Exit.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
3–19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
3.5.3 Establishing a Power-On Password Using Computer Setup
Establishing a power-on password through Computer Setup prevents access to the computer
when power is turned on, unless the password is entered. When a power-on password is set,
Computer Setup presents Password Options under the Security menu. Password options include
Password Prompt on Warm Boot. When Password Prompt on Warm Boot is enabled, the
password must also be entered each time the computer is rebooted.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
✎
3. Select Security, then Power-On Password and follow the instructions on the screen.
4. Before exiting, select File > Save Changes and Exit.
Entering a Power-On Password
To enter a power-on password, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. When the key icon appears on the monitor, type the current password, then press Enter.
Type carefully; for security reasons, the characters you type do not appear on the screen.
✎
If you enter the password incorrectly, a broken key icon appears. Try again. After three
unsuccessful tries, you must turn off the computer, then turn it on again before you can continue.
Entering a Setup Password
If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools
Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com.
If a setup password has been established on the computer, you will be prompted to enter it each
time you run Computer Setup.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
✎
3. When the key icon appears on the monitor, type the setup password, then press Enter.
Type carefully; for security reasons, the characters you type do not appear on the screen.
✎
If you enter the password incorrectly, a broken key icon appears. Try again. After three
unsuccessful tries, you must turn off the computer, then turn it on again before you can continue.
3–20
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
Changing a Power-On or Setup Password
If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools
Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. To change the Power-On password, go to step 3.
To change the Setup password, as soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the
monitor light turns green to enter Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if
necessary.
If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
✎
3. When the key icon appears, type the current password, a slash (/) or alternate delimiter
character, the new password, another slash (/) or alternate delimiter character, and the new
password again as shown:
current password/new password/new password
Type carefully; for security reasons, the characters you type do not appear on the screen.
✎
✎
4. Press Enter.
The new password takes effect the next time you turn on the computer.
Refer to “National Keyboard Delimiter Characters” for information about the alternate delimiter
characters. The power-on password and setup password may also be changed using the Security
options in Computer Setup.
Deleting a Power-On or Setup Password
If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools
Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. To delete the Power-On password, go to step 3.
To delete the Setup password, as soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the
monitor light turns green to enter Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if
necessary.
If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
✎
✎
3. When the key icon appears, type the current password followed by a slash (/) or alternate
delimiter character as shown:
current password/
4. Press Enter.
Refer to the National Keyboard Delimiter Character table below for information about the
alternate delimiter characters. The power-on password and setup password may also be changed
using the Security options in Computer Setup.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
3–21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
National Keyboard Delimiter Characters
Each keyboard is designed to meet country-specific requirements. The syntax and keys that you
use for changing or deleting your password depend on the keyboard that came with your
computer.
National Keyboard Delimiter Characters
Arabic
/
=
-
Greek
-
Russian
/
-
Belgian
Hebrew
.
-
Slovakian
Spanish
BHCSY*
Brazilian
Chinese
Czech
Hungarian
Italian
-
/
/
-
-
Swedish/Finnish
Swiss
/
-
Japanese
Korean
/
/
-
Taiwanese
Thai
/
/
.
Danish
-
Latin American
Norwegian
Polish
French
!
-
Turkish
French Canadian
German
é
-
-
U.S. English
/
Portuguese
-
* For Bosnia-Herzegovina, Croatia, Slovenia, and Yugoslavia
Clearing Passwords
If you forget the password, you cannot access the computer. Refer to the Troubleshooting Guide
on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for instructions on clearing passwords.
If the system is equiped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools Security
Manager Guide at www.hp.com.
3.5.4 DriveLock
DriveLock is an industry-standard security feature that prevents unauthorized access to the data
on ATA hard drives. DriveLock has been implemented as an extension to Computer Setup. It is
only available when hard drives that support the ATA Security command set are detected.
DriveLock is intended for HP customers for whom data security is the paramount concern. For
such customers, the cost of the hard drive and the loss of the data stored on it is inconsequential
when compared with the damage that could result from unauthorized access to its contents. In
order to balance this level of security with the practical need to accommodate a forgotten
password, the HP implementation of DriveLock employs a two-password security scheme. One
password is intended to be set and used by a system administrator while the other is typically set
and used by the end-user. There is no “back-door” that can be used to unlock the drive if both
passwords are lost. Therefore, DriveLock is most safely used when the data contained on the
hard drive is replicated on a corporate information system or is regularly backed up.
In the event that both DriveLock passwords are lost, the hard drive is rendered unusable. For
users who do not fit the previously defined customer profile, this may be an unacceptable risk.
For users who do fit the customer profile, it may be a tolerable risk given the nature of the data
stored on the hard drive.
3–22
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
Using DriveLock
When one or more hard drives that support the ATA Security command set are detected, the
DriveLock option appears under the Security menu in Computer Setup. The user is presented
with options to set the master password or to enable DriveLock. A user password must be
provided in order to enable DriveLock. Since the initial configuration of DriveLock is typically
performed by a system administrator, a master password should be set first. HP encourages
system administrators to set a master password whether they plan to enable DriveLock or keep
it disabled. This will give the administrator the ability to modify DriveLock settings if the drive is
locked in the future. Once the master password is set, the system administrator may enable
DriveLock or choose to keep it disabled.
If a locked hard drive is present, POST will require a password to unlock the device. If a
power-on password is set and it matches the device’s user password, POST will not prompt the
user to re-enter the password. Otherwise, the user will be prompted to enter a DriveLock
password. On a cold boot, either the master or the user password may be used. On a warm boot,
enter the same password used to unlock the drive during the preceding cold-boot. Users will have
two attempts to enter a correct password. On a cold boot, if neither attempt succeeds, POST will
continue but the drive will remain inaccessible. On a warm boot or restart from Windows, if
neither attempt succeeds, POST will halt and the user will be instructed to cycle power.
DriveLock Applications
The most practical use of the DriveLock security feature is in a corporate environment. The
system administrator would be responsible for configuring the hard drive which would involve,
among other things, setting the DriveLock master password and a temporary user password. In
the event that the user forgets the user password or the equipment is passed on to another
employee, the master password can always be used to reset the user password and regain access
to the hard drive.
HP recommends that corporate system administrators who choose to enable DriveLock also
establish a corporate policy for setting and maintaining master passwords. This should be done to
prevent a situation where an employee intentionally or unintentionally sets both DriveLock
passwords before leaving the company. In such a scenario, the hard drive would be rendered
unusable and require replacement. Likewise, by not setting a master password, system
administrators may find themselves locked out of a hard drive and unable to perform routine
checks for unauthorized software, other asset control functions, and support.
For users with less stringent security requirements, HP does not recommend enabling DriveLock.
Users in this category include personal users or users who do not maintain sensitive data on their
hard drives as a common practice. For these users, the potential loss of a hard drive resulting
from forgetting both passwords is much greater than the value of the data DriveLock has been
designed to protect. Access to Computer Setup and DriveLock can be restricted through the
Setup password. By specifying a Setup password and not giving it to end users, system
administrators are able to restrict users from enabling DriveLock.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
3–23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
3.5.5 Smart Cover Sensor
Cover Removal Sensor, available on some models, is a combination of hardware and software
technology that can alert you when the computer cover or side panel has been removed. There are
three levels of protection, as described in the following table.
Smart Cover Sensor Protection Levels
Level
Level 0
Level 1
Setting
Description
Disabled
Notify User
Smart Cover Sensor is disabled (default).
When the computer is restarted, the screen
displays a message indicating that the
computer cover or side panel has been
removed.
Level 2
Setup Password
When the computer is restarted, the screen
displays a message indicating that the
computer cover or side panel has been
removed. You must enter the setup
password to continue.
These settings can be changed using Computer Setup. For more information about Computer
Setup, see the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
✎
Setting the Smart Cover Sensor Protection Level
To set the Smart Cover Sensor protection level, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
✎
3. Select Security > Smart Cover > Cover Removal Sensor, and select the desired security
level.
4. Before exiting, select File > Save Changes and Exit.
Smart Cover Lock
The Smart Cover Lock is a software-controllable cover lock featured on some HP computers.
This lock prevents unauthorized access to the internal components. Computers ship with the
Smart Cover Lock in the unlocked position.
CAUTION: For maximum cover lock security, be sure to establish a setup password. The setup password
prevents unauthorized access to the Computer Setup utility.
Ä
The Smart Cover Lock is available as an option on some systems.
✎
3–24
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
Locking the Smart Cover Lock
To activate and lock the Smart Cover Lock, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
✎
✎
3. Select Security > Smart Cover > Cover Lock > Lock option.
4. Before exiting, select File > Save Changes and Exit.
Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press F10 when the monitor light turns green to enter
Computer Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
If you do not press F10 at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and again press
F10 when the monitor light turns green to access the utility.
3. Select Security > Smart Cover > Cover Lock > Unlock.
4. Before exiting, select File > Save Changes and Exit.
Using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key
If you enable the Smart Cover Lock and cannot enter your password to disable the lock, you will
need a Smart Cover FailSafe Key to open the computer cover. You will need the key in any of the
following circumstances:
■
■
■
■
Power outage
Startup failure
PC component failure (such as processor or power supply)
Forgotten password
CAUTION: The Smart Cover FailSafe Key is a specialized tool available from HP. Be prepared; order
this key before you need one (Tamper-resistant wrench PN 166527-001 or tamper-resistant bits PN
166527-002).
Ä
For more information about using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key, please see the Removal and
Replacement chapter for the specific chassis.
3.5.6 Cable Lock Provision
The rear panel of the computer accommodates a cable lock so that the computer can be
physically secured to a work area. For illustrated instructions, please see the Removal and
Replacement chapter for the specific chassis.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
3–25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Desktop Management
3.5.7 Fingerprint Identification Technology
Eliminating the need to enter user passwords, HP Fingerprint Identification Technology tightens
network security, simplifies the login process, and reduces the costs associated with managing
corporate networks. Affordably priced, it is not just for high-tech, high-security organizations
anymore.
Support for Fingerprint Identification Technology varies by model.
✎
For more information, visit http://h18004.www1.hp.com/products/security/.
3.6 Fault Notification and Recovery
Fault Notification and Recovery features combine innovative hardware and software technology
to prevent the loss of critical data and minimize unplanned downtime.
If the computer is connected to a network managed by HP Client Manager, the computer sends a
fault notice to the network management application. With HP Client Manager, you can also
remotely schedule diagnostics to automatically run on all managed PCs and create a summary
report of failed tests.
3.6.1 Drive Protection System
The Drive Protection System (DPS) is a diagnostic tool built into the hard drives installed in
some HP computers. DPS is designed to help diagnose problems that might result in unwarranted
hard drive replacement.
When HP computers are built, each installed hard drive is tested using DPS, and a permanent
record of key information is written onto the drive. Each time DPS is run, test results are written
to the hard drive. Your service provider can use this information to help diagnose conditions that
caused you to run the DPS software. Refer to the Troubleshooting Guide for instructions on using
DPS.
3.6.2 Surge-Tolerant Power Supply
An integrated surge-tolerant power supply provides greater reliability when the computer is hit
with an unpredictable power surge. This power supply is rated to withstand a power surge of up
to 2000 volts without incurring any system downtime or data loss.
3.6.3 Thermal Sensor
The thermal sensor is a hardware and software feature that tracks the internal temperature of the
computer. This feature displays a warning message when the normal range is exceeded, which
gives you time to take action before internal components are damaged or data is lost.
3–26
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and
Features
Serial ATA = SATA
Parallel ATA = PATA
✎
HP only supports the use of SATA hard drives on these models of computer. The USDT model is
the only product that supports a PATA optical drive. No PATA drives are supported on any other
model.
4.1 SATA Hard Drives
Serial ATA Hard Drive Characteristics
Number of pins/conductors in data cable
Number of pins in power cable
Maximum data cable length
Data interface voltage differential
Drive voltages
7/7
15
39.37 in (100 cm)
400-700 mV
3.3 V, 5V, 12 V
N/A
Jumpers for configuring drive
Data transfer rate
3.0 Gb/s
SATA connectors on the system board are color coded to make identification easier.
Attachment
SATA Identification
Primary channel, device 0
Primary channel, device 1
Secondary channel, device 0
Secondary channel, device 1
Color
Dark blue
Light Blue
White
Port
Sequence
SATA 0
SATA 2
SATA 1
SATA 3
1
4
2
3
Orange
If there is an error on the application of the attach rules, a POST error message may be displayed.
✎
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
4–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features
4.2 SATA Hard Drive Cables
4.2.1 SATA Data Cable
Always use an HP approved SATA 3.0 Gb/s cable as it is fully backwards compatible with the
SATA 1.5 Gb/s drives.
Current HP desktop products ship with SATA 3.0 Gb/s hard drives.
SATA data cables are susceptible to damage if overflexed. Never crease a SATA data cable and
never bend it tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
The SATA data cable is a thin, 7-pin cable designed to transmit data for only a single drive. As
shown in the table, each cable has 3 grounds, and 4 transmit/receive pins.
Pin Number
Usage
Ground
A+
Device Plug
Ground
Host Plug
Ground
P1
P2*
P3*
P4
Transmit data
Transmit data
Ground
Receive data
Receive data
Ground
A-
Ground
B-
P5**
P6**
P7
Receive data
Receive data
Ground
Transmit data
Transmit data
Ground
B+
Ground
*P2 and P3 differential signal pair
**P5 and P6 differential signal pair
4.2.2 SATA Power Cable
Pin
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
Usage
V3.3
Notes
Pin
P9
Usage
V5
Notes
3.3 V power
3.3 V power
3.3 V power
5 V power
V3.3
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
Ground
Ground
Ground
V 12
V3.3
Ground
Ground
Ground
V5
12 V power
12 V power
12 V power
V12
5 V power
5 V power
V12
V5
4–2
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features
4.3 PATA Device Information
The USDT model is the only product that supports a PATA optical drive. No PATA drives are
supported on any other model.
4.4 ATA SMART Drives
The Self Monitoring Analysis and Recording Technology (SMART) ATA drives for the HP
Personal Computers have built-in drive failure prediction that warns the user or network
administrator of an impending failure or crash of the hard drive. The SMART drive tracks fault
prediction and failure indication parameters such as reallocated sector count, spin retry count,
and calibration retry count. If the drive determines that a failure is imminent, it generates a fault
alert.
4.5 Hard Drive Capacities
The combination of the file system and the operating system used in the computer determines the
maximum usable size of a drive partition. A drive partition is the largest segment of a drive that
may be properly accessed by the operating system. A single hard drive may therefore be
subdivided into a number of unique drive partitions in order to make use of all of its space.
Because of the differences in the way that drive sizes are calculated, the size reported by the
operating system may differ from that marked on the hard drive or listed in the computer
specification. Drive size calculations by drive manufacturers are bytes to the base 10 while
calculations by Microsoft are bytes to the base 2.
Drive/Partition Capacity Limits
Maximum Size
File
Controller
Type
System
Operating System
Windows 2000/ XP
Partition
32 GB
2 TB
Drive
2 TB
2 TB
FAT 32
NTFS
ATA
ATA
Windows NT/2000/XP
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
4–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features
4–4
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and
Disassembly Preparation
This chapter provides general service information for the computer. Adherence to the procedures
and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.
CAUTION: When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to the
system board. You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before opening the computer
to prevent system board or component damage.
Ä
5.1 Chassis Designations
5.1.1 Microtower (MT)
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
5–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5.1.2 Slim Tower (ST)
5–2
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5.2 Electrostatic Discharge Information
A sudden discharge of static electricity from your finger or other conductor can destroy
static-sensitive devices or microcircuitry. Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, but damage
occurs. An electronic device exposed to electrostatic discharge (ESD) may not appear to be
affected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. The device may function
normally for a while, but it has been degraded in the internal layers, reducing its life expectancy.
Networks built into many integrated circuits provide some protection, but in many cases, the
discharge contains enough power to alter device parameters or melt silicon junctions.
5.2.1 Generating Static
The following table shows that:
■
■
Different activities generate different amounts of static electricity.
Static electricity increases as humidity decreases.
Relative Humidity
Event
55%
40%
10%
Walking across carpet
7,500 V
3,000 V
400 V
15,000 V
5,000 V
800 V
35,000 V
12,000 V
6,000 V
2,000 V
Walking across vinyl floor
Motions of bench worker
Removing DIPs* from plastic tube
400 V
700 V
Removing DIPs* from vinyl tray
Removing DIPs* from Styrofoam
Removing bubble pack from PCB
Packing PCBs in foam-lined box
2,000 V
3,500 V
7,000 V
5,000 V
4,000 V
5,000 V
20,000 V
11, 0 0 0 V
11,500 V
14,500 V
26,500 V
21,000 V
*These are then multi-packaged inside plastic tubes, trays, or Styrofoam.
700 volts can degrade a product.
✎
5.2.2 Preventing Electrostatic Damage to Equipment
Many electronic components are sensitive to ESD. Circuitry design and structure determine the
degree of sensitivity. The following packaging and grounding precautions are necessary to
prevent damage to electric components and accessories.
■
To avoid hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers such as tubes, bags, or
boxes.
■
Protect all electrostatic parts and assemblies with conductive or approved containers or
packaging.
■
■
■
■
■
Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free stations.
Place items on a grounded surface before removing them from their container.
Always be properly grounded when touching a sensitive component or assembly.
Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry.
Place reusable electrostatic-sensitive parts from assemblies in protective packaging or
conductive foam.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
5–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5.2.3 Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment
Use the following equipment to prevent static electricity damage to equipment:
■
Wrist straps are flexible straps with a maximum of one-megohm 10% resistance in the
ground cords. To provide proper ground, a strap must be worn snug against bare skin. The
ground cord must be connected and fit snugly into the banana plug connector on the
grounding mat or workstation.
■
Heel straps/Toe straps/Boot straps can be used at standing workstations and are
compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conductive floors or dissipative floor mats,
use them on both feet with a maximum of one-megohm 10% resistance between the
operator and ground.
Static Shielding Protection Levels
Method
Voltage
Antistatic plastic
Carbon-loaded plastic
Metallized laminate
1,500
7,500
15,000
5.2.4 Grounding the Work Area
To prevent static damage at the work area, use the following precautions:
■
Cover the work surface with approved static-dissipative material. Provide a wrist strap
connected to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment.
■
■
Use static-dissipative mats, foot straps, or air ionizers to give added protection.
Handle electrostatic sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCB
laminate. Handle them only at static-free work areas.
■
■
■
■
Turn off power and input signals before inserting and removing connectors or test
equipment.
Use fixtures made of static-safe materials when fixtures must directly contact dissipative
surfaces.
Keep work area free of nonconductive materials such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and
Styrofoam.
Use field service tools, such as cutters, screwdrivers, and vacuums, that are conductive.
5.2.5 Recommended Materials and Equipment
Materials and equipment that are recommended for use in preventing static electricity include:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Antistatic tape
Antistatic smocks, aprons, or sleeve protectors
Conductive bins and other assembly or soldering aids
Conductive foam
Conductive tabletop workstations with ground cord of one-megohm +/- 10% resistance
Static-dissipative table or floor mats with hard tie to ground
Field service kits
5–4
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Static awareness labels
Wrist straps and footwear straps providing one-megohm +/- 10% resistance
Material handling packages
Conductive plastic bags
Conductive plastic tubes
Conductive tote boxes
Opaque shielding bags
Transparent metallized shielding bags
Transparent shielding tubes
5.3 Operating Guidelines
To prevent overheating and to help prolong the life of the computer:
■
■
■
Keep the computer away from excessive moisture, direct sunlight, and extremes of heat and
cold.
Operate the computer on a sturdy, level surface. Leave a 10.2-cm (4-inch) clearance on all
vented sides of the computer and above the monitor to permit the required airflow.
Never restrict the airflow into the computer by blocking any vents or air intakes. Do not place
the keyboard, with the keyboard feet down, directly against the front of the desktop unit as
this also restricts airflow.
■
Occasionally clean the air vents on all vented sides of the computer. Lint, dust, and other
foreign matter can block the vents and limit the airflow. Be sure to unplug the computer
before cleaning the air vents.
■
■
Never operate the computer with the cover or side panel removed.
Do not stack computers on top of each other or place computers so near each other that they
are subject to each other’s re-circulated or preheated air.
■
If the computer is to be operated within a separate enclosure, intake and exhaust ventilation
must be provided on the enclosure, and the same operating guidelines listed above will still
apply.
■
■
■
Keep liquids away from the computer and keyboard.
Never cover the ventilation slots on the monitor with any type of material.
Install or enable power management functions of the operating system or other software,
including sleep states.
5.4 Routine Care
5.4.1 General Cleaning Safety Precautions
1. Never use solvents or flammable solutions to clean the computer.
2. Never immerse any parts in water or cleaning solutions; apply any liquids to a clean cloth
and then use the cloth on the component.
3. Always unplug the computer when cleaning with liquids or damp cloths.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
5–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
4. Always unplug the computer before cleaning the keyboard, mouse, or air vents.
5. Disconnect the keyboard before cleaning it.
6. Wear safety glasses equipped with side shields when cleaning the keyboard.
5.4.2 Cleaning the Computer Case
Follow all safety precautions in Section 5.4.1 before cleaning the computer.
To clean the computer case, follow the procedures described below:
■
■
To remove light stains or dirt, use plain water with a clean, lint-free cloth or swab.
For stronger stains, use a mild dishwashing liquid diluted with water. Rinse well by wiping it
with a cloth or swab dampened with clear water.
■
For stubborn stains, use isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol. No rinsing is needed as the alcohol will
evaporate quickly and not leave a residue.
■
■
After cleaning, always wipe the unit with a clean, lint-free cloth.
Occasionally clean the air vents on the computer. Lint and other foreign matter can block the
vents and limit the airflow.
5.4.3 Cleaning the Keyboard
Follow all safety precautions in Section 5.4.1 before cleaning the keyboard.
To clean the tops of the keys or the keyboard body, follow the procedures described in Section
5.4.2.
When cleaning debris from under the keys, review all rules in Section 5.4.1 before following
these procedures:
CAUTION: Use safety glasses equipped with side shields before attempting to clean debris from under
the keys.
Ä
■
■
Visible debris underneath or between the keys may be removed by vacuuming or shaking.
Canned, pressurized air may be used to clean debris from under the keys. Caution should be
used as too much air pressure can dislodge lubricants applied under the wide keys.
■
If you remove a key, use a specially designed key puller to prevent damage to the keys. This
tool is available through many electronic supply outlets.
CAUTION: Never remove a wide leveled key (like the space bar) from the keyboard. If these keys are
improperly removed or installed, the keyboard may not function properly.
Ä
■
Cleaning under a key may be done with a swab moistened with isopropyl alcohol and
squeezed out. Be careful not to wipe away lubricants necessary for proper key functions. Use
tweezers to remove any fibers or dirt in confined areas. Allow the parts to air dry before
reassembly.
5–6
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5.4.4 Cleaning the Monitor
■
Wipe the monitor screen with a clean cloth moistened with water or with a towelette
designed for cleaning monitors. Do not use sprays or aerosols directly on the screen; the
liquid may seep into the housing and damage a component. Never use solvents or flammable
liquids on the monitor.
■
To clean the monitor body follow the procedures in Section 5.4.2.
5.4.5 Cleaning the Mouse
Before cleaning the mouse, ensure that the power to the computer is turned off.
■
Clean the mouse ball by first removing the retaining plate and the ball from the housing. Pull
out any debris from the ball socket and wipe the ball with a clean, dry cloth before
reassembly.
■
To clean the mouse body, follow the procedures in Section 5.4.2.
5.5 Service Considerations
Listed below are some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during the disassembly
and assembly of the computer.
5.5.1 Power Supply Fan
The power supply fan is a variable-speed fan based on the temperature in the power supply.
CAUTION: The cooling fan is always on when the computer is in the “On” mode. The cooling fan is off
when the computer is in “Standby,” “Suspend,” or “Off” modes.
Ä
You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before opening the computer to prevent
system board or component damage.
5.5.2 Tools and Software Requirements
To service the computer, you need the following:
■
■
■
■
■
■
Torx T-15 screwdriver (HP screwdriver with bits, PN 161946-001)
Torx T-15 screwdriver with small diameter shank (for certain front bezel removal)
Flat-bladed screwdriver (may sometimes be used in place of the Torx screwdriver)
Phillips #2 screwdriver
Diagnostics software
HP tamper-resistant T-15 wrench (Smart Cover FailSafe Key, PN 166527-001) or
HP tamper-resistant bits (Smart Cover FailSafe Key, PN 166527-002)
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
5–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5.5.3 Screws
The screws used in the computer are not interchangeable. They may have standard or metric
threads and may be of different lengths. If an incorrect screw is used during the reassembly
process, it can damage the unit. HP strongly recommends that all screws removed during
disassembly be kept with the part that was removed, then returned to their proper locations.
Metric screws have a black finish.
U.S. screws have a silver finish and are used on hard drives only.
✎
As each subassembly is removed from the computer, it should be placed away from the work
area to prevent damage.
✎
5.5.4 Cables and Connectors
Most cables used throughout the unit are flat, flexible cables. These cables must be handled with
care to avoid damage. Apply only the tension required to seat or unseat the cables during
insertion or removal from the connector. Handle cables by the connector whenever possible. In
all cases, avoid bending or twisting the cables, and ensure that the cables are routed in such a way
that they cannot be caught or snagged by parts being removed or replaced.
CAUTION: When servicing this computer, ensure that cables are placed in their proper location during
the reassembly process. Improper cable placement can damage the computer.
Ä
5.5.5 Hard Drives
Handle hard drives as delicate, precision components, avoiding all physical shock and vibration.
This applies to failed drives as well as replacement spares.
■
If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective
packaging and label the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”
■
Do not remove hard drives from the shipping package for storage. Keep hard drives in their
protective packaging until they are actually mounted in the CPU.
■
■
Avoid dropping drives from any height onto any surface.
If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, turn off the computer. Do not remove a hard
drive while the computer is on or in standby mode.
■
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a
drive, avoid touching the connector. For more information about preventing electrostatic
damage, refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information.”
■
■
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic
fields such as monitors or speakers.
5–8
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5.5.6 Lithium Coin Cell Battery
The battery that comes with the computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a
minimum lifetime of about three years.
See the appropriate removal and replacement chapter for the chassis you are working on in this
guide for instructions on the replacement procedures.
WARNING: This computer contains a lithium battery. There is a risk of fire and chemical burn if the
battery is handled improperly. Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, dispose in
water or fire, or expose it to temperatures higher than 140ºF (60ºC). Do not attempt to recharge the
battery.
Å
N
Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general
household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public
collection system or return them to HP, their authorized partners, or their agents.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
5–9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5–10
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Removal and Replacement Procedures—
Microtower (MT) Chassis
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper
service. After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics
utility to verify that all components operate properly.
Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
✎
6.1 Preparation for Disassembly
See Chapter 5, “Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation” for initial
safety procedures.
1. Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer (See Section 6.2,
“External Security Devices”).
2. Close any open software applications.
3. Exit the operating system.
4. Remove any diskette or compact disc from the computer.
5. Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
Ä CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
CAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as
Ä
the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be disconnected
before servicing a unit.
6. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7. Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.
During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing. Keep all
screws with the units removed.
✎
CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the wrong
screw in an application may damage the unit.
Ä
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.2 External Security Devices
6.2.1 Installing a Cable Lock
The cable lock may be used to secure the computer access panel to the chassis and, at the same
time, secure the computer to a fixed object.
Insert the cable lock in the location shown below.
6–2
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.2.2 Installing a Padlock
A padlock may be used by itself to secure the access panel to the computer chassis. A padlock
may also be used with a security cable to secure the computer to a fixed object.
I
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.3 Access Panel
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
CAUTION: Before removing the computer access panel, ensure that the computer is turned off and that
the power cord is disconnected from the electrical outlet.
Ä
2. Loosen the captive thumbscrew 1 that secures the access panel to the computer chassis.
3. Slide the access panel 2 back about 1 inch (2.5 cm), then lift it off the unit.
You may want to lay the computer on its side to install internal parts. Be sure the side with the
access panel and pull grip is facing up.
✎
To install the access panel, reverse the removal procedure.
6–4
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.4 Front Bezel
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel (Section 6.3).
3. To remove the front bezel, press in on the two bottom tabs on the left side of the bezel 1 so
that they release from the chassis. Then press in on the upper tab on the left side of the bezel
so that it releases from the chassis. The bezel will rotate out slightly from left to right.
CAUTION: Do not over-rotate or try to pull the bezel off at this point, otherwise you may break the
remaining hooks on the inside of the bezel.
Ä
4. Press down on the upper right corner of the bezel to release the hook that secures the top of
the bezel to the chassis. Continue to rotate the bezel, then push the bezel to the left to release
the right side latches and rotate the bezel off the chassis from left to right 2.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
To reinstall the front bezel:
1. Position the chassis in the upright position.
2. Insert the hooks on the right side of the bezel into the rectangular holes on the chassis 1 then
rotate the bezel into place 2 so that the three tabs on the left side of the bezel and the single
tab on the upper right corner of the bezel snap into the slots on the chassis.
6–6
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.5 Front Drive Bezels
Follow these steps before removing or installing a front drive bezel.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel (Section 6.3).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.4).
6.5.1 5.25" Drive Bezel Blank
Press the two retaining tabs on the inside of the large bezel towards the outside of the bezel to
release the bezel blank 1. At the same time, pull the bezel blank in to remove it from the front
bezel 2.
To install a bezel blank, reverse the removal procedure.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.5.2 Diskette Drive Bezel
Press the two upper 1 or the two lower 2 tabs for the diskette drive bezel towards the center of
the drive bezel and push the bezel out to remove it from the front bezel.
To install a bezel or a bezel blank, reverse the removal procedure.
6.5.3 3.5" Drive Bezel Blank
Press the two upper 1 or the two lower 2 tabs for the 3.5" drive bezel towards the center of the
3.5" drive bezel and push the bezel blank out to remove it from the front bezel.
To install a bezel blank, reverse the removal procedure.
6–8
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.6 Cable Management
Always follow good cable management practices when working inside the computer.
■
■
Keep cables away from major heat sources like the heatsink.
Do not jam cables on top of expansion cards or memory modules. Printed circuit cards like
these are not designed to take excessive pressure on them.
■
■
Keep cables clear of sliding or moveable parts to prevent them from being cut or crimped
when the parts are moved.
When folding a flat ribbon cable, never fold to a sharp crease. Sharp creases may damage the
wires.
■
■
■
■
■
Some flat ribbon cables come prefolded. Never change the folds on these cables.
Do not bend any cable sharply. A sharp bend can break the internal wires.
Never bend a SATA data cable tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
Never crease a SATA data cable.
Do not rely on components like the drive cage, power supply, or computer cover to push
cables down into the chassis. Always position the cables to lay properly by themselves.
When removing the power supply power cables from the P1 or P3 connectors on the system
board, always follow these steps:
1. Squeeze on the top of the retaining latch attached to the cable end of the connector 1.
2. Grasp the cable end of the connector and pull it straight up 2.
CAUTION: Always pull the connector - NEVER pull on the cable. Pulling on the cable could damage the
cable and result in a failed power supply.
Ä
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.6.1 Cable Connections
System board connectors are color-coded to make it easier to find the proper connection.
Cable
To
System board, 24-pin
CPU power, 4-pin
1st SATA Hard drive
2nd SATA Hard drive
Diskette drive
Cable Designator
Power Supply
P1
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
P3
P4
P5
P8
2nd Optical drive
1st Optical drive
To
P10
P11
Cable
PCA Designator
Diskette drive
System board
P10, FLOPPY (Black)
P60, SATA 0 (Dark Blue)
P61, SATA 1 (White)
1st SATA Hard drive
System board
1st ODD or 2nd Hard drive if
no ODD present
System board
2nd or 4th Hard drive if no
ODD present
System board
System board
P62, SATA 2 (Light blue)
P63, SATA 3 (Orange)
2nd ODD or 3rd HDD if no
ODD present
Serial port B
System board
System board
System board
System board
System board
System board
System board
System board
System board
P52, COM B
Hood lock solenoid
Heatsink fan
P124, HLCK
P70, CPU FAN
Hood Sensor
Front power button/LED
Front I/O USB
Speaker
P125, HSENS
P5, F_PNL
P24, FRNT USB (Yellow)
P6, SPKR (White)
P23, FRTNT AUD, (Black)
P8, CHASSIS FAN (Red)
Front audio
Chassis fan
6–10
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.7 Memory
CAUTION: The memory module sockets have gold metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
important to use memory modules with gold metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or oxidation
resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.
Ä
Ä
Ä
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards.
Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching
a grounded metal object. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more information.
CAUTION: When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so
may damage the module.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel and rotate the computer so the system board is parallel to the table
to make it easier to work on (Section 6.3).
WARNING: To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system components to
cool before touching.
Å
3. Open both latches of the memory module socket 1, and insert the memory module into the
socket 2. Refer to Appendix F, “Memory” for the correct sequence for installing memory
modules to get optimal performance.
A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with the tab
on the memory socket. It may be easier to install a memory module in some cases if the main
power cable from the power supply to the system board is temporarily disconnected.
✎
4. Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted and
properly seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position 3.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
The computer automatically recognizes the additional memory when the computer is turned on.
✎
To reassemble the computer, reverse the removal procedure.
6–12
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.8 Expansion Cards
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel and rotate the computer so the system board is parallel to the table
to make it easier to work on (Section 6.3).
3. On the rear of the computer, a sliding slot cover lock secures the expansion card brackets and
expansion slot covers in place. Remove the thumbscrew that holds the slot cover lock in
place 1 and slide the slot cover lock away from the brackets 2 so that they are no longer
secured by the lock.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
4. Before installing an expansion card, remove the expansion slot cover or the existing
expansion card.
Before removing an installed expansion card, disconnect any cables that may be attached to the
expansion card.
✎
a. If you are installing an expansion card in a vacant socket, remove the appropriate
expansion slot cover on the back of the chassis. Pull the slot cover straight up from the
socket then away from the inside of the chassis.
b. If removing a standard PCI expansion card, hold the card at each end, and carefully rock
it back and forth until the connectors pull free from the socket. Pull the expansion card
straight up from the socket 1 then away from the inside of the chassis 2 to release it
from the chassis frame. Be sure not to scrape the card against the other components.
6–14
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
c. If removing a PCI Express x16 card, pull the retention arm on the back of the expansion
socket away from the card and carefully rock the card back and forth until the connectors
pull free from the socket. Pull the expansion card straight up from the socket then away
from the inside of the chassis to release it from the chassis frame. Be sure not to scrape
the card against the other components.
5. If not replacing the old expansion card with a new expansion card, install an expansion slot
cover to close the open slot. Insert the metal slot cover in the opened slot and slide the slot
cover lock down to secure the slot cover in place.
CAUTION: After removing an expansion card, you must replace it with a new card or expansion slot
cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.
Ä
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6. If replacing or adding a new expansion card, hold the card just above the expansion slot on
the system board then move the card toward the rear of the chassis 1 so that the bracket on
the card is aligned with the open slot on the rear of the chassis. Press the card straight down
into the expansion slot on the system board 2.
When installing an expansion card, press firmly on the card so that the whole connector seats
properly in the expansion card slot.
✎
7. If you are replacing an expansion card, store the old card in the anti-static packaging that
contained the new card.
8. While holding the expansion card bracket against the chassis, slide the slot cover lock down
toward the expansion card brackets and slot covers 1 to secure them in place and replace the
thumbscrew 2 that secures the slot cover lock.
9. Connect external cables to the installed card, if needed. Connect internal cables to the system
board, if needed.
6–16
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.9 Drives
The computer supports up to six drives that may be installed in various configurations.
This Section describes the procedure for replacing or upgrading the storage drives. A Torx T-15
screwdriver is needed to remove and install the guide screws on a drive.
CAUTION: Make sure personal files on the hard drive are backed up to an external storage device
before removing the hard drive. Failure to do so will result in data loss. After replacing the primary hard
drive, you will need to run the Restore Plus! CD to load the HP factory-installed files.
Ä
6.9.1 Drive Positions
Drive Positions
Item
1
Description
Two 5.25-inch, half-height bays for optional drives
2
Two standard 3.5-inch, one-third height bays (1.44-MB diskette drives shown)*
Two internal 3.5-inch, one-third height bays for hard drives
3
*A 3.5-inch diskette drive or zip drive may be installed in this bay but the correct bezel must be
installed to ensure proper air flow.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.9.2 Removing a Drive
1. Remove any removable media, such as a compact disc or diskette, from the drive.
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
3. Remove the access panel and rotate the computer so the system board is parallel to the table
to make it easier to work on (Section 6.3).
4. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.4).
5. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the drive, as shown in the following
illustrations.
Disconnecting Optical or Hard Drive Cables
Some products use straight cable connectors while others use right angle connectors.
✎
6–18
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
Disconnecting Diskette Drive Cables
Releasing the Drives
6. A latch drive bracket with release tabs secures the drives in the drive bay. Lift the release tab
on the latch drive bracket 1 for the drive you want to remove, then slide the drive from its
drive bay 2.
7. Remove the four guide screws (two on each side) from the old drive. You will need these
screws to install a new drive.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.9.3 Installing a Drive
Ä■CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:
If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, shut down the operating system properly, then turn off
the computer. Do not remove a hard drive while the computer is on or in standby mode.
■
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,
avoid touching the connector. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more
information about preventing electrostatic damage.
■
■
■
Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields
such as monitors or speakers.
1. Install four guide screws (two on each side) into the new drive. The screws help guide the
drive into its proper position in the bay.
❏
If this is a new installation, guide screws are provided on the front of the chassis under
the front bezel.
❏
If this is a replacement drive, use the screws removed from the old drive.
There are a total of eight extra guide screws on the front of the chassis. Four have U.S. threads
and four have metric threads. Metric screws have a black finish. U.S. threaded screws have a
silver finish. Make sure to install the appropriate guide screws into the drive.
✎
2. Align the guide screws with the guide slots, then slide the drive into the drive bay, making
sure it is fully seated.
6–20
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
3. Reconnect the power and data cables to the drive as shown in the following illustrations.
Refer to Chapter 4, “Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features” for information on
attaching the cabling to get optimum performance.
✎
Connecting Optical or Hard Drive Cables
Some products use straight cable connectors while others use right angle connectors.
✎
Connecting Diskette Drive Cables
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
4. Install the front bezel (Section 6.4).
5. Install the access panel (Section 6.3).
6. Turn on the computer.
If you replaced the primary hard drive, the Restore Plus! CD may be used to restore the operating
system, software drivers, and/or any software applications that were preinstalled on the
computer. Follow the instructions in the guide included with the Restore Plus! CD. When the
restore process has completed, reinstall any personal files that were backed up before replacing
the hard drive.
✎
6–22
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.10 Chassis Fan
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel and rotate the computer so the system board is parallel to the table
to make it easier to work on (Section 6.3).
3. Disconnect the power cable that connects the chassis fan to the system board 1.
4. Remove the four screws from the exterior rear of the chassis that secure the fan 2.
5. Remove the fan from the chassis 3.
To install the chassis fan, reverse the removal procedure.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.11 Front I/O Panel Housing Assembly
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel and rotate the computer so the system board is parallel to the table
to make it easier to work on (Section 6.3).
3. Disconnect three attaching cables from the system board: the power switch/LED cable, the
front USB cable, and the front audio cable.
4. Remove the two screws that secure the housing to the chassis 1 then pull the housing away
from the chassis 2.
To install the housing assembly, reverse the removal procedures.
6–24
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.12 Front I/O Devices
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel and rotate the computer so the system board is parallel to the table
to make it easier to work on (Section 6.3).
3. Remove the front I/O panel assembly (Section 6.11).
4. Remove the two screws that hold the USB and audio port assembly in place 1.
5. Remove the I/O device assembly from the I/O panel by pushing it out of the housing 2.
To install the I/O devices, reverse the removal procedures and then reinstall the housing
assembly.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.13 Power Switch Assembly
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel and rotate the computer so the system board is parallel to the table
to make it easier to work on (Section 6.3).
3. Remove the front I/O panel assembly (Section 6.11).
4. Squeeze the switch holder retaining clips together 1 and push the switch assembly out of the
front I/O panel housing 2.
5. Place the switch holder with the switch installed into the inside of the front I/O panel housing
and position the legs of the retaining clip into the clip slots. Press firmly so that the clips will
penetrate the slot openings and latch into place. If one clip will not easily engage, it may be
necessary to use the end of a ball point pen (or another thin, stiff object) to compress the clip
leg while inserting it into the clip slot.
6. Reconnect the housing assembly to the front of the chassis and reconnect the cables to the
system board.
6–26
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.14 Heatsink
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel and rotate the computer so the system board is parallel to the table
to make it easier to work on (Section 6.3).
3. Disconnect the heatsink fan cable from the system board.
4. Disconnect the four-pin power cable from the system board to make it easier to access the
heatsink.
5. Loosen the four captive screws 1 that secure the heatsink to the system board tray.
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
even the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
Ä
6. Lift the heatsink from atop the processor 2 and set it on its side to keep from contaminating
the work area with thermal grease.
There are two different heatsinks used on the Microtower chassis and are illustrated here.
✎
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
When reinstalling the heatsink, make sure that its bottom has been cleaned with an alcohol wipe
and fresh thermal grease has been applied to the top of the processor.
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
Ä
evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
6–28
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.15 Processor
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 6.3).
3. Disconnect the heatsink control cable from the system board and remove the heatsink
(Section 6.14).
4. Rotate the locking lever to its full open position 1.
5. Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position 2.
6. Carefully lift the processor from the socket 3.
CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and handling
them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to replace the
system board.
Ä
Ä
CAUTION: The heatsink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage
to the processor’s solder connections.
To install a new processor:
1. Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.
2. Secure the locking lever.
If reusing the existing heatsink, go to step 3.
If using a new heatsink, go to step 6.
3. If reusing the existing heatsink, clean the bottom of the heatsink with the alcohol pad
provided in the spares kit.
CAUTION: Before reinstalling the heatsink you must clean the top of the processor and the bottom of the
heatsink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has evaporated, apply thermal
grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the spares kit.
Ä
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
4. Apply the thermal grease provided in the spares kit to the top of the processor and install the
heatsink atop the processor.
5. Go to step 7.
6. If using a new heatsink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heatsink and
place it in position atop the processor.
7. Secure the heatsink to the system board and system board tray with the four captive screws
and attach the heatsink control cable to the system board.
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
Ä
evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to ensure
that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can be
found on the Web at: http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
✎
6–30
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.16 Speaker
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel and rotate the computer so the system board is parallel to the table
to make it easier to work on (Section 6.3).
3. Move/remove any components necessary to gain access to the speaker.
4. Disconnect the speaker wire from the system board connector.
5. Remove the two plastic push pins that secure the speaker to the chassis.
6. Remove the speaker by lifting it up and out of the retaining clips.
To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedures.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.17 Power Supply
WARNING: Voltage is always present on the system board when the computer is plugged into an
Å
active AC outlet. To avoid possible personal injury and damage to the equipment the power cord should
be disconnected from the computer and/or the AC outlet before opening the computer.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel and rotate the computer so the system board is parallel to the table
to make it easier to work on (Section 6.3).
3. Disconnect all power cables from the mass storage devices and from the system board.
4. Remove the screws that connect the power supply to the chassis 1.
6–32
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
5. Pull the power supply towards the front of the chassis while depressing the two sets of
retaining clips 1 to allow the power supply to move far enough to lift it from the chassis 2.
To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.18 System Board
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel and rotate the computer so the system board is parallel to the table
to make it easier to work on (Section 6.3).
3. Remove all PCI and PCI Express expansion boards (Section 6.8).
4. Disconnect all cables connected to the system board, noting their location for reinstallation.
5. Remove the 3-1/4" drives from the drive cage to make it easier to handle the system board.
6. Remove the eight screws that secure the system board to the chassis 1, then slide the system
board towards the front of the chassis to remove it 2.
To install the system board, reverse the removal procedures.
6–34
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.19 Battery
The battery that comes with your computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a
lifetime of about three years. When replacing the battery, use a battery equivalent to the battery
originally installed on the computer. The computer comes with a 3-volt lithium coin cell battery.
The lifetime of the lithium battery can be extended by plugging the computer into a live AC wall
socket. The lithium battery is only used when the computer is NOT connected to AC power.
✎
WARNING: This computer contains an internal lithium manganese dioxide battery. There is a risk of fire and
Å
burns if the battery is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:
■
■
■
■
Do not attempt to recharge the battery.
Do not expose to temperatures higher than 140°F (60°C)
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water.
Replace the battery only with the HP spare designated for this product.
CAUTION: Before replacing the battery, it is important to back up the computer CMOS settings. When
the battery is removed or replaced, the CMOS settings will be cleared. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10)
Utility Guide for information on backing up the CMOS settings.
Ä
N
Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general
household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public
collection system or return them to HP, their authorized partners, or their agents.
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional
equipment. Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by
briefly touching a grounded metal object.
Ä
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel and rotate the computer so the system board is parallel to the table
to make it easier to work on (Section 6.3).
It may be necessary to remove an expansion card to gain access to the battery.
✎
3. Locate the battery and battery holder on the system board.
4. Depending on the type of battery holder on your system board, complete the following
instructions to replace the battery:
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.19.1 Type 1 Battery Holder
1. Lift the battery out of its holder.
2. Slide the replacement battery into position, positive side up.
3. The battery holder automatically secures the battery in the proper position.
4. Replace the computer access panel (Section 6.3).
5. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
6. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
6–36
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.19.2 Type 2 Battery Holder
1. To release the battery from its holder, squeeze the metal clamp that extends above one edge
of the battery. When the battery pops up, lift it out 1.
2. To insert the new battery, slide one edge of the replacement battery under the holder’s lip
with the positive side up 2. Push the other edge down until the clamp snaps over the other
edge of the battery.
3. Replace the computer cover or access panel (Section 6.3).
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
6–37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Microtower (MT) Chassis
6.19.3 Type 3 Battery Holder
1. Pull back on the clip 1 that holds the battery in place, then remove the battery 2.
2. Insert the new battery and position the clip back in place.
3. Replace the computer access panel (Section 6.3).
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
6–38
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Removal and Replacement Procedures—
Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper
service. After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics
utility to verify that all components operate properly.
Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
✎
7.1 Preparation for Disassembly
See Chapter 5, “Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation,”for initial
safety procedures.
1. Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer (Section 7.2,
“Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock,” and Section 7.4, “External Security Devices”).
2. Close any open software applications.
3. Exit the operating system.
4. Remove any diskette or compact disc from the computer.
5. Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
Ä CAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
CAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as
Ä
the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be disconnected
before servicing a unit.
6. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7. Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.
During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing. Keep all
screws with the units removed.
✎
CAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the wrong
screw in an application may damage the unit.
Ä
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
8. Lift the computer of the stand.
7–2
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.2 Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock
If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock use Computer Setup to unlock the lock. Refer to the
Desktop Management Guide on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for more information
about the Smart Cover Lock.
If you cannot access Computer Setup to unlock the cover you will need to remove the locking
solenoid by using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key (Spare part number 166527-001 or
166527-002). Once the solenoid has been deactivated or removed the access panel can be
removed.
The Smart Cover FailSafe Key will be needed in any of the following circumstances:
■
■
■
■
Power outage
Startup failure
Processor or power supply failure
Lost password
To open the computer cover with the Smart Cover Lock engaged:
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key, remove the tamper-proof screw 1 that secures the
Smart Cover Lock to the inside of the chassis.
3. Push the metal arm that wraps around the air vent grid up and back 2 to free the Smart Cover
Lock from the chassis.
4. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
To reattach the Smart Cover Lock:
1. Install the Smart Cover Lock assembly on the inside of the rear panel with the metal arm 1
wrapped around the air vent grid on the back of the chassis.
2. Use the supplied tamper-resistant screw 2 to secure the Smart Cover Lock to the chassis.
7–4
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.3 Hood Sensor
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly.
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the special security clip (Section 7.4.1) from the top corner of the power supply
cage.
4. Raise the power supply to its full upright position.
5. Disconnect the hood sensor cable from the system board.
6. Slide the hood sensor switch mounted on the power supply towards the outside of the
computer 1 and lower it through the slot 2.
To install the hood sensor, reverse the removal procedure.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.4 External Security Devices
7.4.1 Security Clip
A special clip is required to secure the computer from intrusion. This clip must be installed
before installing the computer cover.
7.4.2 Cable Lock
The cable lock may be used to secure the computer cover to the chassis and, at the same time,
secure the computer to a fixed object.
Insert the cable lock in the location shown below.
7–6
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.4.3 Padlock
A padlock may be used by itself to secure the computer cover to the computer chassis. A padlock
may also be used with a security cable to secure the computer to a fixed object.
I
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.5 Computer Cover
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
CAUTION: Before removing the computer cover, ensure that the computer is turned off and that the
power cord is disconnected from the electrical outlet.
Ä
1. Press the buttons on the left and right sides of the computer 1.
2. Slide the computer cover towards the front of the computer until it stops 2, then lift it up and
off the chassis.
To install the computer cover, reverse the removal procedure.
7–8
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.6 Front Drive Bezels
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the drive bezel by pushing the top tab on the right side of the larger front bezel as
shown 1 and rotating the drive bezel away from the larger front bezel 2.
The drive bezel will vary depending on the computer configuration.
✎
4. Install a bezel or a bezel blank by pushing the bezel into place.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
There are three drive bezel inserts that are available.
Item
1
Description
Diskette drive bezel
Hard drive bezel
3.5” drive bezel
2
3
7–10
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.7 Cable Management
The Small Form Factor chassis is a very compact computer and proper routing of the internal
cables is critical to the operation of the computer. Follow good cable management practices when
working inside the computer.
■
■
Keep cables away from major heat sources like the heatsink.
Do not jam cables on top of expansion cards or memory modules. Printed circuit cards like
these are not designed to take excessive pressure on them.
■
■
Keep cables clear of movable or rotating parts like the power supply and drive cage to
prevent them from being cut or crimped when the component is lowered into its normal
position.
When folding a flat ribbon cable, never fold to a sharp crease. Sharp creases may damage the
wires.
■
■
■
■
■
Some flat ribbon cables come prefolded. Never change the folds on these cables.
Do not bend any cable sharply. A sharp bend can break the internal wires.
Never bend a SATA data cable tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
Never crease a SATA data cable.
Do not rely on components like the drive cage, power supply, or computer cover to push
cables down into the chassis. Always position the cables to lay properly by themselves.
When removing the power supply power cables from the P1 connector on the system board,
always follow these steps:
1. Squeeze on the top of the retaining latch attached to the cable end of the connector 1.
2. Grasp the cable end of the connector and pull it straight up 2.
CAUTION: Always pull the connector - NEVER pull on the cable. Pulling on the cable could damage the
cable and result in a failed power supply.
Ä
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.7.1 Cable Connections
System board connectors are color-coded to make it easier to find the proper connection.
Cable
To
System board, 24-pin
Diskette drive
Cable Designator
Power Supply
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P7
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
CPU power, 6-pin
1st SATA Hard drive
2nd SATA Hard drive
Optical drive
Cable
To
PCA Designator
Diskette drive
1st Hard drive
System board
P10, FLOPPY (Black)
P60, SATA 0 (Dark Blue)
P61, SATA 1 (White)
System board
1st ODD or 2nd Hard drive if
no ODD present
System board
2nd Hard drive if ODD present System board
P62, SATA 2 (Light blue)
P54, COM A
Serial port A
Serial port B
System board
System board
System board
System board
System board
System board
System board
System board
System board
System board
P52, COM B
Hood lock solenoid
Heatsink fan
P124, HLCK
P8, CPU FAN
Hood Sensor
Front power button/LED
Front I/O USB
Speaker
P125, HSENSE
P5, Pb/LED
P24, FRNT USB (Yellow)
P6, SPKR
Front audio
P23, FRTNT AUD, (Blue)
P9, CH FAN
Chassis fan
7–12
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.8 Memory
CAUTION: The memory module sockets have gold metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
important to use memory modules with gold metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or oxidation
resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.
Ä
Ä
Ä
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards.
Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching
a grounded metal object. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more information.
CAUTION: When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so
may damage the module.
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock
(Section 7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
WARNING: To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system components to
cool before touching.
Å
4. Open both latches of the memory module socket 1, and insert the memory module into the
socket 2. Refer to Appendix F, “Memory” for the correct sequence for installing memory
modules to get optimal performance.
A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with the tab
on the memory socket.
✎
5. Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted and
properly seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position 3.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for any additional modules that you want to install.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
The computer automatically recognizes the additional memory when the computer is turned on.
✎
To reassemble the computer, reverse the removal procedure.
If you normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and enable
the Smart Cover Sensor.
✎
7.9 Vertically Oriented Expansion Card
7.9.1 Expansion Card Retainer
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, restart the computer and enter Computer Setup to
unlock the lock.
2. Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external
devices.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
4. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
5. Release the slot cover retention latch that secures the PCI slot covers by lifting the green tab
on the latch and rotating the latch to the full open position 1.
6. Remove the single screw that keeps the card retainer in place 2 and slide the retainer to the
left to remove it from the chassis 3.
To install the card retainer, reverse the removal procedure.
7–14
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.9.2 PCI Expansion Card
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, restart the computer and enter Computer Setup to
unlock the lock.
2. Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external
devices.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
4. Remove the computer cover. (Section 7.5).
5. Identify the slot into which you want to insert the expansion card.
6. Release the slot cover retention latch that secures the PCI slot covers by lifting the green tab
on the latch and rotating the latch to the full open position 1.
7. Remove the slot cover by sliding it up and out of the computer 2.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
8. Install the expansion card by sliding the card under the slot cover retention latch then
pressing the card down into the slot on the system board.
Be sure not to scrape other components in the chassis when installing an expansion card.
✎
9. Rotate the slot cover retention latch back in place to secure the expansion card.
When you install an expansion card, make sure the metal bracket on the card slides into the slot
on the back of the computer then press down firmly on the card so that the whole connector seats
properly in the expansion card slot.
✎
CAUTION: All expansion card slots on the rear of the computer must contain either an expansion card
or slot cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.
Ä
7–16
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.9.3 PCI Express Expansion Card
To remove a PCI Express expansion card:
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, restart the computer and enter Computer Setup to
unlock the lock.
2. Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external
devices.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
4. Remove the computer cover. (Section 7.5).
5. Release the slot cover retention latch on the back of the computer that secures the PCI slot
covers by lifting the green tab on the latch and rotating the latch to the open position.
6. Pull the retention arm on the back of the PCI Express expansion socket away from the card
(on x16 card socket only) and carefully rock the card back and forth until the connectors pull
free from the socket. Pull the expansion card straight up from the socket then away from the
inside of the chassis. Be sure not to scrape the card against the other components.
7. If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the
open slot.
8. Rotate the slot cover retention latch back in place to secure the expansion cards and
expansion slot covers.
CAUTION: All expansion card slots on the rear of the computer must contain either an expansion card
or slot cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.
Ä
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.10 PCI Riser Card Assembly and Backwall
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock
(Section 7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
4. Remove all PCI and PCI Express expansion cards from the PCI expansion slots
(Section 7.9).
5. Rotate the optical and diskette drive cage to its upright position.
6. Remove the security clip (Section 7.4.1), rotate the power supply to its full upright
position 1, then lift the power supply straight up and out of the chassis 2.
7–18
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7. Remove the SmartCover lock from the backwall of the chassis using the special security
wrench and disconnect its cable from the system board. (Section 7.2)
8. Disconnect the data and power cables from the system board.
9. Disconnect the “Serial A” cable from the system board, remove the two screws that secure
the serial connector to the backwall, then remove the serial connector.
10. Remove the fan shroud by lifting it up and out (Section 7.12).
11. Remove the chassis fan (Section 7.18)
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
12. Remove the long mounting screw that secures the system board tray to the chassis.
13. Slide the system board tray assembly towards the front of the chassis about 6 cm (1/4 inch)
and lift the system board up and out of the chassis.
7–20
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
14. Remove the three screws that secure the backwall assembly to the chassis 1, then slide the
backwall assembly a few millimeters/inches toward the space vacated by the power supply
and lift out(2.
15. Slide the new backwall onto the rear chassis 1. Secure it with the three screws removed from
the old backwall 2.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
16. Install the serial connector into the new backwall using the two screws that were removed
from the serial connector in a previous step. Reconnect the “Serial A” cable to the system
board.
17. Install the system board tray assembly. Be sure the keyhole slot on the system board sits
properly over the locking pins. When the system board is in position, replace the long
mounting screw to secure the system board to the chassis.
18. Install the chassis fan and connect the control cable to the system board.
19. Reconnect all power and data cables to the system board. Be sure to use proper cable
handling and placement precautions.
20. Install the power supply. Rotate it to its normal operating position. Be sure to use proper
cable handling and placement precautions.
21. Install the full-height PCI expansion card in the available slot in the new PCI riser card cage
assembly.
22. Install the new PCI riser card cage assembly on the new backwall by aligning the cage with
the guide rails on the backwall. Press down firmly on the cage to secure it in place on the
backwall. Be sure the riser card in the cage is properly seated in the PCI expansion slot on
the system board.
7–22
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
23. Rotate the drive cage back down to its normal position. Be sure to use proper cable handling
and placement precautions.
ÄCAUTION: Cables are very sensitive. Overbending, creasing, or pinching can damage cables.
24. Replace the fan shroud on top of the fan.
25. Replace the computer cover.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.11 Drives
A Torx T-15 screwdriver is needed to remove and install the guide screws on a drive.
CAUTION: Make sure personal files on the hard drive are backed up to an external storage device
Ä
before removing the hard drive. Failure to do so will result in data loss. After replacing the primary hard
drive, you will need to run the Restore Plus! CD to load the HP factory-installed files.
7.11.1 Drive Positions
Drive Positions
Item
Description
Item
Description
1
3.5-inch, internal, standard hard
drive bay
3
3.5-inch drive bay (1.44-MB diskette
drive shown)*
2
5.25-inch drive bay for optional
drives
*A 3.5-inch diskette drive, hard drive, or media card reader may be installed in this bay but the
correct bezel must be installed to ensure proper air flow.
To verify the type and size of the storage device installed in the computer, run Computer Setup.
7–24
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.11.2 Optical Drive
CAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of the drives before removing the drive from the
computer.
Ä
An optical drive is a CD-ROM, CD-R/RW, DVD-ROM, DVD+R/RW, or CD-RW/DVD Combo
drive.
✎
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock (Section
7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
4. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position by pulling on the green-tabbed lip.
5. Disconnect the power and data cables from the rear of the optical drive.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
6. Rotate the drive cage down to its normal position before trying to remove the drive.
7. Press the green drive retainer latch and slide the drive forward and lift it from the drive cage.
8. When replacing the drive, transfer the four screws from the old drive to the new one. The
screws take the place of drive rails.
CAUTION: Use only 5-mm long screws as guide screws. Longer screws can damage the internal
components of the drive.
Ä
7–26
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.11.3 External 3.5-inch Drive
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock (Section
7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
4. Remove the optical drive (Section 7.11.2).
5. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position by pulling on the green-tabbed lip.
6. Disconnect the signal 1 and power 2 cables from the drive. The other end of the cables
should remain connected to the system board. (Diskette drive is shown.)
7. Rotate the drive cage down to its normal position before trying to remove the drive.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
8. Press the green drive retention latch 1 located on the side of the diskette drive to disengage
the drive from the drive cage and slide the diskette drive forward approximately 6mm
(1/4 inch) 2.
9. Lift the rear of the drive up so that the rear guide screws clear the top of the drive cage 1.
As the drive rises it automatically slides forward until it is free from the drive cage 2.
To replace the drive, reverse the removal procedure making sure you rotate the rear of the drive
down, pivoting on the front screws.
When replacing the drive, transfer the four metric screws from the old drive to the new one. The
screws take the place of drive rails.
✎
7–28
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.11.4 Primary Hard Drive
A Torx T-15 screwdriver is needed to remove and install the guide screws on a hard drive.
CAUTION: Make sure personal files on the hard drive are backed up to an external storage device
before removing the hard drive. Failure to do so will result in data loss. After replacing the primary hard
drive, you will need to run the Restore Plus! CD to load the HP factory-installed files.
Ä
Ä■CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:
If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, shut down the operating system properly, then turn off
the computer. Do not remove a hard drive while the computer is on or in standby mode.
■
Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,
avoid touching the connector. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more
information about preventing electrostatic damage.
■
■
■
Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.
Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields
such as monitors or speakers.
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock
(Section 7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
4. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position by pulling on the green-tabbed lip.
It is not necessary to remove the drives from the drive cage.
✎
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
5. Remove the security clip that secures the backwall to the power supply.
6. Rotate the power supply to its full upright position.
7–30
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the hard drive.
8. Pull the tab that locks the drive in place away from the drive 1, slide the hard drive toward
the front of the computer, then lift it up and out of the bay 2.
To install a hard drive, reverse the above procedure.
The replacement hard drive kit includes several data cables. Make sure to use the cable that is
exactly the same as the factory-installed cable.
✎
✎
If the system has only one SATA hard drive, the data cable must be connected to the dark blue
connector labeled SATA0 first to avoid any hard drive performance problems.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
When replacing the hard drive, transfer the four screws from the old drive to the new one. The
screws take the place of drive rails. You will need a Torx T-15 screwdriver to remove and
re-install the guide screws. HP has provided four extra 6-32 standard guide screws on the front of
the chassis, under the computer cover. The 6-32 standard guide screws are silver and are used
only for the hard drive.
✎
If you replaced the primary hard drive, insert the Restore Plus! CD to restore the operating
system, software drivers, and any software applications that were preinstalled on the computer.
Follow the instructions in the guide included with the Restore Plus! CD. When the restore
process has completed, reinstall any personal files that you backed up before replacing the hard
drive.
✎
7–32
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.12 Fan Shroud
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Lift up on the fan shroud to remove it from the computer.
When replacing the shroud, make sure that it does not get caught on the wires from either the fan
or the speaker.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.13 Front I/O Devices
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the two screws that secure the front I/O device to the chassis 1.
4. Rotate the drive cage to its full upright position.
5. Disconnect the front I/O cable from the system board.
6. Push the front I/O device into the chassis 2 and snake the cable through the tunnel 3 to
remove the device from the chassis.
To reinstall the front I/O device, reverse the removal procedure.
7–34
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.14 Heatsink
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the fan shroud (Section 7.12).
4. Disconnect the fan control cable from the system board.
5. Loosen the four captive screws that secure the heatsink to the system board tray.
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
even the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
Ä
6. Lift the heatsink from atop the processor and set it on its side to keep from contaminating the
work area with thermal grease.
When reinstalling the heatsink, make sure that its bottom has been cleaned with an alcohol wipe
and fresh thermal grease has been applied to the top of the processor.
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
Ä
ÄCAUTION: Failure to install the fan shroud may cause the computer to overheat.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.15 Processor
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the fan shroud (Section 7.12).
4. Disconnect the heatsink control cable from the system board and remove the heatsink
(Section 7.14).
5. Rotate the locking lever to its full open position 1.
6. Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position 2.
7. Carefully lift the processor from the socket 3.
CAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and handling
Ä
them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to replace the
system board.
CAUTION: The heatsink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage
to the processor’s solder connections.
Ä
To install a new processor:
1. Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.
2. Secure the locking lever.
If reusing the existing heatsink, go to step 3.
If using a new heatsink, go to step 6.
7–36
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
3. If reusing the existing heatsink, clean the bottom of the heatsink with the alcohol pad
provided in the spares kit.
CAUTION: Before reinstalling the heatsink you must clean the top of the processor and the bottom of the
heatsink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has evaporated, apply thermal
grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the spares kit.
Ä
4. Apply the thermal grease provided in the spares kit to the top of the processor and install the
heatsink atop the processor.
5. Go to step 7.
6. If using a new heatsink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heatsink and
place it in position atop the processor.
7. Secure the heatsink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws and
attach the heatsink control cable to the system board.
CAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
Ä
After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to ensure
that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can be
found on the Web at: http:\\h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
✎
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.16 Speaker
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the fan shroud (Section 7.12).
4. Remove any memory modules that might interfere with the screwdriver used for removing
the speaker.
5. Disconnect the speaker wire from the system board.
6. Remove the two screws that secure the speaker to the chassis 1.
7. Rotate the top of the speaker back to clear the lip on the top of the chassis, then lift the
speaker up and out of the chassis 2.
To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedures.
7–38
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.17 Power Supply
WARNING: Voltage is always present on the system board when the computer is plugged into an
active AC outlet. To avoid possible personal injury and damage to the equipment the power cord should
be disconnected from the computer and/or the AC outlet before opening the computer.
Å
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the security clip.
4. Rotate the drive cage up and disconnect the power cables from all of the drives.
5. Disconnect the power cables from the system board.
6. Release the power supply cable from the cable retaining clips on the bottom of the chassis
under the drive cage.
7. Disconnect the hood sensor from the system board and remove the sensor from the power
supply if required (Section 7.3).
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
8. Rotate the power supply to its full upright position 1, then lift the power supply straight up
and out of the chassis 2.
To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure.
CAUTION: When installing the power supply cables, make sure they are properly positioned so they
are not cut by the drive cage and are not pinched by the rotating power supply.
Ä
7–40
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.18 Chassis Fan
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the fan shroud (Section 7.12).
4. Disconnect the chassis fan cable from the system board.
5. Remove the four screws that secure the fan to the chassis, then remove the fan from the
chassis.
To install the chassis fan, reverse the removal procedure. Be sure to orient the air flow into the
unit. The molded grille on the chassis fan should face the inside of the chassis.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.19 System Board
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove all PCI and PCI Express expansion boards (Section 7.9).
4. Remove the fan shroud from the chassis (Section 7.11).
5. Remove the chassis fan from the chassis (Section 7.18)
6. Rotate the drive cage to its full upright position.
7. Remove the security clip (Section 7.4.1) and rotate the power supply to its full upright
position.
8. Disconnect all data and power cables from the system board.
7–42
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
9. Disconnect the serial port from the system board.
10. Disconnect the balance of the cables from the system board.
11. Remove the long mounting screw that secures the system board tray to the chassis.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
12. Slide the system board tray assembly towards the front of the chassis, about 6 mm (1/4 inch)
and lift the system board up and out of the chassis.
13. Remove the heatsink from the system board and the system board tray (Section 7.14).
To install the system board, reverse the removal procedure.
The heatsink should be installed on the system board before the system board is reinstalled in the
chassis.
✎
CAUTION: Before reinstalling the heatsink you must clean the top of the processor and the bottom of the
Ä
heatsink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has evaporated, apply thermal
grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the spares kit.
When reinstalling the system board it is important to secure the system board and tray to the
chassis with the long retaining screw before performing any subsequent steps.
✎
CAUTION: When reconnecting the cables it is important that they be positioned so they do not interfere
with the rotation of the drive cage or power supply.
Ä
7–44
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.20 Drive Clutch Components
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the optical drive and any other drive in the rotating drive cage (Section 7.11.2 and
Section 7.11.3).
4. Remove the chassis fan (Section 7.18).
5. Remove the system board (Section 7.19).
6. Remove the five screws that secure the clutch base to the chassis.
7. Hold the drive cage in the up position while removing the clutch base from the floor of the
chassis.
CAUTION: When moving the clutch base be careful not to damage the wires that are threaded through
it.
Ä
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
8. Hold the drive cage in the upright position while removing the two screws that secure the
clutch finger assembly to the drive cage.
The clutch finger assembly doe not have to be removed to remove the power switch.
✎
To replace the drive clutch components, reverse the removal procedure.
7–46
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.21 Power Switch Assembly
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove all drives from the rotating drive cage (Section 7.11.2 and Section 7.11.3).
4. Remove the chassis fan (Section 7.18).
5. Remove the system board (Section 7.19).
6. Remove the drive ckutch base (Section 7.20).
7. Disconnect the power switch/LED cable from the system board.
8. Squeeze the switch holder retaining clips together at the front of the chassis 1 and push the
switch assembly out of the chassis 2. Push the two LEDs out of the chassis 3.
9. If necessary, the LED holders may also be removed by squeezing the clips and pushing them
out of the front of the chassis.
To install the power switch and LEDs, reverse the removal procedure.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.22 Battery
The battery that comes with this computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a
lifetime of about three years. When replacing the battery, use a battery equivalent to the battery
originally installed on the computer. The computer comes with a 3-volt lithium coin cell battery.
The lifetime of the lithium battery can be extended by plugging the computer into a live AC wall
socket. The lithium battery is only used when the computer is NOT connected to AC power.
✎
WARNING: This computer contains an internal lithium manganese dioxide battery. There is a risk of fire and
Å
burns if the battery is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:
■
■
■
Do not attempt to recharge the battery.
Do not expose to temperatures higher than 140°F (60°C).
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or
water.
■
Replace the battery only with the HP spare designated for this product.
CAUTION: Before replacing the battery, it is important to back up the computer CMOS settings. When
the battery is removed or replaced, the CMOS settings will be cleared. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10)
Utility Guide for information on backing up the CMOS settings.
Ä
N
Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general
household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public
collection system or return them to HP, their authorized partners, or their agents.
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional
equipment. Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by
briefly touching a grounded metal object.
Ä
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 7.5).
It may be necessary to remove an expansion card to gain access to the battery.
✎
3. Locate the battery and battery holder on the system board.
4. Carefully pull the cable bundle out of the way to access the battery.
5. Depending on the type of battery holder on your system board, complete the following
instructions to replace the battery:
7–48
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.22.1 Type 1 Battery Holder
1. Lift the battery out of its holder.
2. Slide the replacement battery into position, positive side up.
3. The battery holder automatically secures the battery in the proper position.
4. Replace the computer access panel.
5. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
6. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.22.2 Type 2 Battery Holder
1. To release the battery from its holder, squeeze the metal clamp that extends above one edge
of the battery. When the battery pops up, lift it out 1.
2. To insert the new battery, slide one edge of the replacement battery under the holder’s lip
with the positive side up 2. Push the other edge down until the clamp snaps over the other
edge of the battery.
3. Replace the computer access panel.
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
7–50
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7.22.3 Type 3 Battery Holder
1. Pull back on the clip 1 that holds the battery in place, then remove the battery 2.
2. Insert the new battery and position the clip back in place.
3. Replace the computer access panel.
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
7–51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Slim Tower (ST) Chassis
7–52
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
Connector Pin Assignments
This appendix contains the pin assignments for many computer and workstation connectors.
Some of these connectors may not be used on the product being serviced.
Keyboard
Connector and Icon
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
Data
Unused
Ground
4
5
6
+5 VDC
Clock
Unused
Mouse
Connector and Icon
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
Data
Unused
Ground
4
5
6
+5 VDC
Clock
Unused
Ethernet BNC
Connector and Icon
Pin
Signal
Data
1 (Center)
2 (Shield)
Ground
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
A–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connector Pin Assignments
Ethernet RJ-45
Connector and Icon
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
(+) Transmit Data
(-) Transmit Data
(+) Receive Data
Unused
5
6
7
8
Unused
(-) Receive Data
Unused
Unused
Ethernet AUI
Pin Signal
Connector and Icon
Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
Ground
9
Positive AUI Differential Receive
Negative AUI Differential Collision
Positive AUI Differential Collision
Negative AUI Differential Transmit
10
11
12
+12V
Ground
Ground
5
6
7
8
Positive AUI Differential Transmit
Ground
13
14
15
16
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Ground
Negative AUI Differential Receive
Parallel Interface
Connector and Icon
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
Strobe
Data Bit 0
Data Bit 1
7
8
9
Data Bit 5
Data Bit 6
Data Bit 7
13
14
15
Select
Auto Linefeed
Error
4
5
6
Data Bit 2
Data Bit 3
Data Bit 4
10
11
12
Acknowledge
Busy
Paper End
16
Initialize Printer
Select IN
Signal Ground
17
18-25
A–2
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connector Pin Assignments
Serial Interface, Powered and Non-Powered
Connector and Icon
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
Carrier Detect (12V if powered)
Receive Data
Transmit Data
4
5
6
Data Terminal Ready
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
7
8
9
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Ring Indicator (5V if powered)
USB
Connector and Icon
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
+5 VDC
- Data
+ Data
Ground
Microphone
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone)
Pin
Signal
1 (Tip)
2 (Ring)
3 (Shield)
Audio_left
Power_Right
Ground
1 2 3
Headphone
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone)
Pin
Signal
1 (Tip)
2 (Ring)
3 (Shield)
Audio_Left
Audio_Right
Ground
1 2 3
Line-In Audio
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone)
Pin
Signal
1 (Tip)
2 (Ring)
3 (Shield)
Audio_In_Left
Audio_In_Right
Ground
1 2 3
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
A–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connector Pin Assignments
Line-Out Audio
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone)
Pin
Signal
1 (Tip)
2 (Ring)
3 (Shield)
Audio_Out_Left
Audio_Out_Right
Ground
1 2 3
External Infrared Transceiver
Connector and Icon
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
Transmit
Receive
Ground
4
5
6
5V
Mode
Not Used
7
8
Not Used
Not Used
Monitor
Connector and Icon
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
Red Analog
Green Analog
Blue Analog
6
7
8
Ground
Ground
Ground
11
12
13
Not used
DDC Serial Data
Horizontal Sync
4
5
Not used
Ground
9
10
+5V (fused)
Ground
14
15
Vertical Sync
DDC Serial Clock
A–4
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connector Pin Assignments
ATA/ATAPI (IDE) Standard Drive Cable
Connector
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
Reset
Ground
DD7
15
16
17
18
19
DD1
DD14
DD0
DD15
Ground
29
30
31
32
33
DMAK
Ground
INTRQ
IOCS16
DA1
DD8
DD6
6
DD9
DD5
DD10
DD4
DD11
20
21
22
23
24
(Key)
34
35
36
37
38
PDIAG (cable detect)
7
DMARQ
Ground
DIOW
Ground
DA0
8
9
10
DA2
CS1FX
CS3FX
11
12
13
14
DD3
25
26
27
28
DIOR
39
40
DASP
Ground
DD12
DD2
Ground
IORDY
CSEL
DD13
CD-ROM 50-Pin Connector
Connector
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
Audio L-ch
Audio R-ch
Audio GND
GND
RESET-
14
15
16
17
18
DD12
DD3
DD13
DD2
27
28
29
30
31
IORDY
DMACK-
INTRQ
IOCS16-
DA1
40
41
42
43
44
+5V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
DD14
6
DD8
DD7
DD9
DD6
DD10
19
20
21
22
23
DD1
DD15
DD0
DMARQ
GND
32
33
34
35
36
PDIAG-
DAO
45
46
47
48
49
GND
7
GND
8
9
10
DA2
CSEL
GND
Vendor-specific
CS1FX-
CS3FX-
11
12
13
DD5
DD11
DD4
24
25
26
DIOR-
DIOW-
GND
37
38
39
DASP-
+5V
+5V
50
Vendor-specific
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
A–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connector Pin Assignments
24-Pin Power (CMT and MT models)
Connector
24
13
1
12
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
+3.3 V
+3.3 V
GND
+5 V
GND
+5 V
7
GND
13
14
15
16
17
18
+3.3 V
-12 V
GND
PSON
GND
GND
19
20
21
22
23
24
GND
open
+5 V
+5 V
+5 V
GND
8
POK
9
+5 Vaux
+12 V
+12 V
+3.3 V
10
11
12
24-Pin MicroFit Power (USDT, SFF, and ST models)
Connector
24
13
1
12
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
+5 Vaux
GND
7
PWRGD
+3.3 V
+3.3 V
Tach
13
14
15
16
17
18
+12 V
19
20
21
22
23
24
GND
8
+5 V Sense
GND
+3.3 Sense
+3.3 V
+3.3 V
GND
+5 V
9
+5 V
PS_ON
GND
10
11
12
+5 V
GND
+5 V
Fan-CMD
+3.3 V
-12 V
4-Pin Power (for CPU) (MT and CMT models)
Connector and Icon
Pin
CMT and MT Signal
GND
1
2
GND
3
+12 V CPU
-12 V CPU
4
A–6
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connector Pin Assignments
6-Pin Power (for CPU) (USDT, SFF, and ST models)
Connector and Icon
Pin
1
Signal
GND
2
GND
3
GND
4
12 V CPU
12 V CPU
+12 V
4
6
5
6
SATA Data and Power
Drive Connector
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
S1
S5
Ground
B-
S2
S6
A+
B+
S3
S7
A-
Ground
S4
Ground
P1
P5
P9
P13
V 3.3
Ground
V 5
P2
P6
P10
P14
V 3.3
P3
P7
P11
P15
V 3.3
V 5
Reserved
V 12
P4
P8
P12
Ground
V 5
Ground
Ground
Ground
V 12
V 12
*S = Data, P = Power
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
A–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connector Pin Assignments
PCI Express
x1, x4, x8, and x16 PCI Express Connector
Pin A
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
PRSNT1#
+12V
6
JTAG3
JTAG4
JTAG5
+3.3v
+3.3v
11
12
13
14
15
PERST#
GND
REFCLK+
REFCLK-
GND
16
17
18
19
20
PERp0
PERn0
GND
RSVD
GND
21
22
23
24
25
PERp1
PERn1
GND
7
+12V
8
9
10
GND
JTAG2
GND
PERp2
26
27
28
29
30
PERn(2)
GND
31
32
33
34
35
GND
RSVD
RSVD
GND
PERp4
36
37
38
39
40
PERn4
GND
41
42
43
44
45
GND
GND
PERp6
PERn6
GND
46
47
48
49
50
GND
PERp7
PERn7
GND
RSVD
GND
GND
PERp3
PERn3
PERp5
PERn5
51
52
53
54
55
GND
PERp8
PERn8
GND
GND
56
57
58
59
60
PERp9
PERn9
GND
61
PERn10
GND
66
67
68
69
70
GND
71
72
73
74
75
GND
GND
PERp13
PERn13
GND
62
63
64
65
GND
PERp12
PERn12
GND
GND
PERp11
PERn11
PERp10
GND
76
77
78
79
80
PERp14
PERn14
GND
81
82
PERn15
GND
GND
PERp15
Pin B information is on the next page
Notes:
x1 PCI Express uses pins 1-18
x4 PCI Express uses pins 1-32
x8 PCI Express uses pins 1-49
x16 PCI Express uses pins 1-8
A–8
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connector Pin Assignments
PCI Express
x1, x4, x8, and x16 PCI Express Connector
Pin B
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
+12V
+12V
RSVD
GND
SMCLK
6
SMDAT
GND
11
12
13
14
15
WAKE#
RSVD
16
17
18
19
20
GND
PRSNT2#
GND
PETp1
PETn1
21
22
23
24
25
GND
GND
PETp2
PETn2
GND
7
8
9
10
+3.3v
GND
JTAG1
3.3vAux
PETp0
PETn0
26
27
28
29
30
GND
PETp3
PETn3
GND
31
32
33
34
35
PRSNT2#
GND
PETp4
PETn4
GND
36
37
38
39
40
GND
PETp5
PETn5
GND
GND
41
42
43
44
45
PETp6
PRTn6
GND
GND
PETp7
46
47
48
49
50
PETn7
GND
PRSNT2#
GND
PETp8
RSVD
51
52
53
54
55
PETn8
GND
GND
PETp9
PETn9
56
57
58
59
60
GND
61
62
63
64
65
GND
66
67
68
69
70
PETp12
PETn12
GND
71
72
73
74
75
PETn13
GND
GND
PETp11
PETn11
GND
PETp10
PETn10
GND
GND
GND
PETp14
PETn14
GND
PETp13
76
77
78
79
80
GND
81
82
PRSNT2#
RSVD
GND
PETp15
PETn15
GND
Notes:
x1 PCI Express uses pins 1-18
x4 PCI Express uses pins 1-32
x8 PCI Express uses pins 1-49
x16 PCI Express uses pins 1-82
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
A–9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connector Pin Assignments
DVI Connector
Connector and Icon
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
T.M.D.S. Data2-
13
14
15
16
T.M.D.S. Data3+
+5V Power
Ground (for +5V)
Hot Plug Detect
T.M.D.S. Data2+
T.M.D.S. Data2/4 Shield
T.M.D.S. Data4-
5
6
7
8
T.M.D.S. Data4+
DDC Clock
DDC Data
17
18
19
20
T.M.D.S. Data0-
T.M.D.S. Data0+
T.M.D.S. Data0/5 Shield
T.M.D.S. Data5-
No Connect
9
T.M.D.S. Data1-
21
22
23
24
T.M.D.S. Data5+
T.M.D.S. Data Shield
T.M.D.S. Clock+
T.M.D.S. Clock-
10
11
12
T.M.D.S. Data1+
T.M.D.S. Data1/3 Shield
T.M.D.S. Data3-
A–10
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
Power Cord Set Requirements
The power supplies on some computers have external power switches. The voltage select switch
feature on the computer permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-120 or 220-240
volts AC. Power supplies on those computers that do not have external power switches are
equipped with internal switches that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the
proper voltage.
The power cord set received with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country
where you purchased the equipment.
Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you
use the computer.
General Requirements
The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:
1. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for
evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed.
2. The power cord set must have a minimum current capacity of 10A (7A Japan only) and a
nominal voltage rating of 125 or 250 volts AC, as required by each country’s power system.
3. The diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG, and the length of the
cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet).
The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items
placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and
the point where the cord exits from the product.
WARNING: Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is
damaged in any manner, replace it immediately.
Å
Japanese Power Cord Requirements
For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product.
ÄCAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
B–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Cord Set Requirements
Country-Specific Requirements
Additional requirements specific to a country are shown in parentheses and explained below.
Accrediting
Agency
Accrediting
Agency
Country
Country
Australia (1)
Austria (1)
Belgium (1)
Canada (2)
EANSW
OVE
CEBC
CSA
Italy (1)
IMQ
Japan (3)
METI
Norway (1)
Sweden (1)
NEMKO
SEMKO
Denmark (1)
Finland (1)
France (1)
DEMKO
SETI
Switzerland (1)
United Kingdom (1)
United States (2)
SEV
BSI
UL
UTE
Germany (1)
VDE
1. The flexible cord must be <HAR> Type HO5VV-F, 3-conductor, 0.75mm2 conductor size.
Power cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wall plug) must bear the certification mark of
the agency responsible for evaluation in the country where it will be used.
2. The flexible cord must be Type SVT or equivalent, No. 18 AWG, 3-conductor. The wall plug
must be a two-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15A, 125V) or NEMA 6-15P (15A,
250V) configuration.
3. Appliance coupler, flexible cord, and wall plug must bear a “T” mark and registration
number in accordance with the Japanese Dentori Law. Flexible cord must be Type VCT or
VCTF, 3-conductor, 0.75 mm2 conductor size. Wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type
with a Japanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7A, 125V) configuration.
B–2
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C
POST Error Messages
POST Error Messages
An error message results if the Power-On Self-Test (POST) encounters a problem. This test runs
when the system is turned on, checking assemblies within the computer and reporting any errors
found.
Not all computers use all of the codes listed.
POST Error Messages
Screen Message
Probable Cause
Recommended Action
101-Option ROM
Checksum Error
System ROM or
expansion board option
ROM checksum.
1. Verify the correct ROM.
2. Flash the ROM if needed.
3. If an expansion card was recently
added, remove it and see if the
problem remains.
4. Clear CMOS.
5. If the message disappears, there
may be a problem with the
expansion card.
6. Replace the system board.
103-System Board
Failure
DMA or timers.
1. Clear CMOS.
2. Remove expansion boards.
3. Replace the system board.
110 -O u t o f M e m o r y
Space for Option
ROMs
Recently added PCI
expansion card contains
an option ROM too large
to download during
POST.
1. If a PCI expansion card was recently
added, remove it to see if the
problem remains.
2. In Computer Setup, set Advanced
> Device Options > NIC PXE
Option ROM Download to
Disable to prevent PXE option ROM
for the internal NIC from being
downloaded during POST to free
more memory for an expansion
card’s option ROM. Internal PXE
option ROM is used for booting from
the NIC to a PXE server.
3. Ensure that the ACPI/USB Buffers @
Top of Memory setting in Computer
Setup is enabled.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
C–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POST Error Messages
POST Error Messages (Continued)
Screen Message
Probable Cause
Recommended Action
162-System Options Not Configuration incorrect.
Run Computer Setup and check
configuration in Advanced >
Onboard Devices.
Reset the date and time under Control
Panel. If the problem persists, replace
the RTC battery.
Set
RTC (real-time clock)
battery may need to be
replaced.
163-Time & Date Not
Set
Invalid time or date in
configuration memory.
RTC (real-time clock)
battery may need to be
replaced.
Reset the date and time under Control
Panel (Computer Setup can also be
used). If the problem persists, replace the
RTC battery.
CMOS jumper may not
be properly installed.
Check for proper placement of the
CMOS jumper, if applicable.
164-Memory Size Error
Memory amount has
changed since the last
boot (memory added or
removed).
Press the F1 key to save the memory
changes.
Memory configuration is
incorrect.
1. Run Computer Setup (F10 Setup) or
Windows utilities.
2. Make sure memory module(s) are
installed properly.
3. If third party memory has been
added, test using HP-only memory.
4. Verify proper memory module type.
201-Memory Error
RAM failure.
1. Run Computer Setup (F10 Setup) or
Windows utilities.
2. Ensure memory modules are
installed correctly.
3. Verify proper memory module type.
4. Remove and replace the identified
faulty memory module(s).
5. If the error persists after replacing
memory modules, replace the system
board.
213-Incompatible
memory Module in
memory Socket(s)
X,X, X
A memory module in
memory socket identified
in the error message is
missing critical SPD
information, or is
1. Verify proper memory module type.
2. Try another memory socket.
3. Replace memory with a module
conforming to the SPD standard.
incompatible with the
chipset.
214-DIMM
Configuration Warning
Populated DIMM
configuration is not
optimized.
Rearrange the DIMMS so that each
channel has the same amount of
memory.
C–2
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7730
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POST Error Messages
POST Error Messages (Continued)
Screen Message
Probable Cause
Recommended Action
219-ECC Memory
Recently added memory
module(s) support ECC
memory error correction.
1. If additional memory was recently
added, remove it to see if the
problem remains.
Module Detected. ECC
Modules not supported
on this platform
2. Check product documentation for
memory support information.
301-Keyboard Error
Keyboard failure.
1. Reconnect keyboard with computer
turned off.
2. Check connector for bent or missing
pins.
3. Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
4. Replace keyboard.
303-Keyboard
Controller Error
I/O board keyboard
controller.
1. Reconnect keyboard with computer
turned off.
2. Replace the system board.
304-Keyboard or
System Unit Error
Keyboard failure.
1. Reconnect the keyboard with
computer turned off.
2. Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
3. Replace keyboard.
4. Replace system board.
404-Parallel Port
Address Conflict
Detected
Both external and internal
ports are assigned to
parallel port X.
1. Remove any parallel port expansion
cards.
2. Clear CMOS.
3. Reconfigure card resources and/or
run Computer Setup.
410 -Audio Interrupt
Conflict
IRQ address conflicts with Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
another device. in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
411-Network Interface
Card Interrupt Conflict
IRQ address conflicts with Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
another device.
in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
501-Display Adapter
Failure
Graphics display
controller.
1. Reseat the graphics card (if
applicable).
2. Clear CMOS.
3. Verify that the monitor is attached
and turned on.
4. Replace the graphics card (if
applicable).
510-Flash Screen image Flash Screen image has
Reflash the system ROM with the latest
BIOS image
corrupted
errors.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
C–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POST Error Messages
POST Error Messages (Continued)
Screen Message
Probable Cause
Recommended Action
1. Reseat the CPU fan.
511-CPU, CPUA, or
CPUB Fan not detected
CPU fan is not connected
or may have
malfunctioned.
2. Reseat fan cable.
3. Replace the CPU fan.
512-Chassis, rear
chassis, or front chassis
fan not detected
Chassis, rear chassis, or
front chassis fan is not
connected or may have
malfunctioned.
1. Reseat chassis, rear chassis, or front
chassis fan.
2. Reseat fan cable.
3. Replace chassis, rear chassis, or
front chassis fan.
514-CPU or Chassis Fan CPU or chassis fan is not
1. Reseat CPU or chassis fan.
2. Reseat fan cable.
not detected.
connected or may have
malfunctioned.
3. Replace CPU or chassis fan.
601-Diskette Controller
Error
Diskette controller
circuitry or floppy drive
circuitry incorrect.
1. Run Computer Setup (F10 Setup).
2. Check and/or replace cables.
3. Clear CMOS.
4. Replace diskette drive.
5. Replace the system board.
605-Diskette Drive Type Mismatch in drive type.
Error
1. Run Computer Setup (F10 Setup).
2. Disconnect any other diskette
controller devices (tape drives).
3. Clear CMOS.
610-External Storage
Device Failure
External tape drive not
connected.
Reinstall tape drive or press F1 and
allow system to reconfigure without the
drive.
611-Primary Floppy Port
Address Assignment
Conflict
Configuration error.
Run Computer Setup and check the
configuration in Advanced >
Onboard Devices.
660-Display cache is
detected unreliable
Integrated graphics
Replace system board if minimal
graphics degrading is an issue.
controller display cache
is not working properly
and will be disabled.
912-Computer Cover
Has Been Removed
Since Last System Start
Up
Computer cover was
removed since the last
system startup.
No action required.
917-Front Audio not
Connected
Front audio harness has
been detached or
unseated from the system
board.
Reconnect or replace front audio
harness.
C–4
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7730
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POST Error Messages
POST Error Messages (Continued)
Screen Message
Probable Cause
Recommended Action
918-Front USB Not
Connected
Front USB harness has
been detached or
unseated from system
board.
Reconnect or replace front USB harness.
921-Device in PCI
Express slot failed to
initialize.
There is an
Try rebooting the system. If the error
reoccurs, the device may not work with
this system.
incompatibility/problem
with this device and the
system or PCI Express Link
could not be retrained to
an x1.
1151-S e r i a l Po r t A
Address Conflict
Detected
Both external and internal
serial ports are assigned
to COM1.
1. Remove any serial port expansion
cards.
2. Clear CMOS.
3. Reconfigure card resources and/or
run Computer Setup or Windows
utilities.
1152-Serial Port B
Address Conflict
Detected
Both external and internal
serial ports are assigned
to COM2.
1. Remove any serial port expansion
cards.
2. Clear CMOS.
3. Reconfigure card resources and/or
run Computer Setup or Windows
utilities.
1155-Serial Port Address Both external and internal
1. Remove any serial port expansion
cards.
Conflict Detected
serial ports are assigned
to same IRQ.
2. Clear CMOS.
3. Reconfigure card resources and/or
run Computer Setup or Windows
utilities.
1201-System Audio
Address Conflict
Detected
Device IRQ address
conflicts with another
device.
Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
1202-MIDI Port Address Device IRQ address
Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
Conflict Detected
conflicts with another
device.
1203-Game Port
Address Conflict
Detected
Device IRQ address
conflicts with another
device.
Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
C–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POST Error Messages
POST Error Messages (Continued)
Screen Message
Probable Cause
Recommended Action
1720 -SMART Hard
Drive Detects Imminent
Failure
Hard drive is about to
fail. (Some hard drives
have a firmware patch
that will fix an erroneous
error message.)
1. Determine if hard drive is giving
correct error message. Enter
Computer Setup and run the Drive
Protection System test under
Storage > DPS Self-test.
2. Apply firmware patch if applicable
(available at www.hp.com/support).
3. Back up contents and replace hard
drive.
1796-SATA Cabling
Error
One or more SATA
Ensure SATA connectors are used in
ascending order. For one device, use
SATA 0. For two devices, use SATA 0
and SATA 1. For three devices, use SATA
0, SATA1, and SATA 2.
devices are improperly
attached. For optimal
performance, the SATA 0
and SATA 1 connectors
must be used before
SATA 2 and SATA 3.
1797-SATA Drivelock is
not supported in RAID
mode.
Drivelock is enabled on
one or more SATA hard
drives, and they cannot
be accessed while the
system is configured for
RAID mode.
Either remove the Drivelocked SATA
device or disable the Drivelock feature.
To disable the Drivelock feature, enter
Computer Setup, change Storage >
Storage Options > SATA
Emulation to IDE, and select File >
Save Changes and Exit. Reenter
Computer Setup and select Security >
Drivelock. For each listed
Drivelock-capable SATA device, ensure
Drivelock is Disabled. Lastly, change
Storage > Storage Options >
SATA Emulation back to RAID and
select File > Save Changes and
Exit.
1801-Microcode Patch
Error
Processor not supported
by ROM BIOS.
1. Upgrade BIOS to proper version.
2. Change the processor.
2200-PMM Allocation
Error during MEBx
Download
Memory error during
POST execution of the
Management Engine
(ME) BIOS Extensions
option ROM
1. Reboot the computer.
2. Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
memory modules, and reboot the
computer.
3. If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the
computer, restore the original
memory configuration, and reboot
the computer.
4. If the error persists, replace the
system board.
C–6
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7730
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POST Error Messages
POST Error Messages (Continued)
Screen Message
Probable Cause
Recommended Action
2201-MEBx Module did Memory error during
1. Reboot the computer.
not checksum correctly
POST execution of the
Management Engine
(ME) BIOS Extensions
option ROM
2. Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
memory modules, and reboot the
computer.
3. If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the power
cord, restore the original memory
configuration, and reboot the
computer.
4. If the error persists, replace the
system board.
2202-PMM
Deallocation Error
during MEBx cleanup
Memory error during
POST execution of the
Management Engine
(ME) BIOS Extensions
option ROM
1. Reboot the computer.
2. Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
memory modules, and reboot the
computer.
3. If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the power
cord, restore the original memory
configuration, and reboot the
computer.
4. If the error persists, replace the
system board.
2203-Setup error
during MEBx execution
MEBx selection or exit
resulted in a setup failure.
1. Reboot the computer.
2. Unplug the power cord, re-seat the
memory modules, and reboot the
computer.
3. If the memory configuration was
recently changed, unplug the power
cord, restore the original memory
configuration, and reboot the
computer.
4. If the error persists, replace the
system board.
2204-Inventory error
during MEBx execution
BIOS information passed
to the MEBx resulted in a
failure.
1. Reboot the computer.
2. If the error persists, update to the
latest BIOS version.
3. If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
C–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POST Error Messages
POST Error Messages (Continued)
Screen Message
Probable Cause
Recommended Action
2205-Interface error
during MEBx execution
MEBx operation
1. Reboot the computer.
experienced a hardware
error during
2. If the error persists, update to the
latest BIOS version.
communication with ME.
3. If the error still persists, replace the
system board.
Invalid Electronic Serial
Number.
Electronic serial number
has become corrupted.
1. Run Computer Setup. If Setup
already has data in the field or will
not allow the serial number to be
entered, download from
http://www.hp.com and run
SP5572.EXE (SNZERO.EXE).
2. Run Computer Setup and try to enter
serial number under Security, System
ID, then save changes.
Network Server Mode
Active and No
Keyboard Attached
Keyboard failure while
Network Server Mode
enabled.
1. Reconnect keyboard with computer
turned off.
2. Check connector for bent or missing
pins.
3. Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
4. Replace keyboard.
Parity Check 2
Parity RAM failure.
Run Computer Setup and diagnostic
utilities.
System will not boot
without fan.
CPU fan not installed or
disconnected in VSFF
chassis.
1. Remove the computer cover, press
the power button, and see if the
processor fan spins. If not spinning,
make sure the fan cable is plugged
onto the system board header.
Ensure the heatsink is properly
seated and installed.
2. If the fan is plugged in and the
heatsink is properly seated but the
fan does not spin, then replace the
heatsink-fan assembly.
C–8
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7730
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POST Error Messages
POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes
This section covers the front panel LED codes as well as the audible codes that may occur before
or during POST that do not necessarily have an error code or text message associated with them.
WARNING: When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to the
system board. To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be sure to
disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and allow the internal system components to cool before
touching.
Å
Look for the LED between the DIMM sockets. If the LED is illuminated, the system still has power. Power off
the computer and remove the power cord before proceeding.
If you see flashing LEDs on a PS/2 keyboard, look for flashing LEDs on the front panel of the
computer and refer to the following table to determine the front panel LED codes.
✎
Recommended actions in the following table are listed in the order in which they should be
performed.
No all diagnostic lights and audible codes are available on all models.
POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes
Activity
Beeps Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Green Power LED
On.
None
Computer on.
None
Green Power LED
flashes every two
seconds.
None
Computer in
Suspend to RAM
mode (some
models only) or
normal Suspend
mode.
None required. Press any key or move the
mouse to wake the computer.
Red Power LED
flashes two times,
once every
2
Processor thermal
protection
activated:
1. Ensure that the computer air vents are
not blocked and the processor cooling
fan is running.
second, followed
by a two second
pause. Beeps stop
after fifth iteration
but LEDs continue
until problem is
solved.
A fan may be
blocked or not
turning.
2. Open hood, press power button, and
see if the processor fan spins. If the
processor fan is not spinning, make
sure the fan's cable is plugged onto
the system board header.
OR
The heatsink/fan
assembly is not
properly attached
to the processor.
3. If fan is plugged in, but is not
spinning, then replace heatsink-fan
assembly.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
C–9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POST Error Messages
POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (Continued)
Activity
Beeps Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Red Power LED
flashes three times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause. Beeps stop
after fifth iteration
but LEDs continue
until problem is
solved.
3
Processor not
installed (not an
indicator of bad
processor).
1. Check to see that the processor is
present.
2. Reseat the processor.
Red Power LED
flashes four times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause. Beeps stop
after fifth iteration
but LEDs continue
until problem is
solved.
4
Power failure
(power supply is
overloaded).
1. Open the hood and ensure the 4 or
6-wire power supply cable is seated
into the connector on the system
board.
2. Check if a device is causing the
problem by removing ALL attached
devices (such as hard, diskette, or
optical drives, and expansion cards).
Power on the system. If the system
enters the POST, then power off and
replace one device at a time and
repeat this procedure until failure
occurs. Replace the device that is
causing the failure. Continue adding
devices one at a time to ensure all
devices are functioning properly.
3. Replace the power supply.
4. Replace the system board.
To avoid damage to the DIMMs or the
Red Power LED
flashes five times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause. Beeps stop
after fifth iteration
but LEDs continue
until problem is
solved.
5
Pre-video memory
error.
Ä
system board, you must unplug the
computer power cord before
attempting to reseat, install, or remove
a DIMM module.
1. Reseat DIMMs.
2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to
isolate the faulty module.
3. Replace third-party memory with HP
memory.
4. Replace the system board.
C–10
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7730
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POST Error Messages
POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (Continued)
Activity
Beeps Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Red Power LED
flashes six times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause. Beeps stop
after fifth iteration
but LEDs continue
until problem is
solved.
6
Pre-video
graphics error.
For systems with a graphics card:
1. Reseat the graphics card.
2. Replace the graphics card.
3. Replace the system board.
For systems with integrated graphics,
replace the system board.
Red Power LED
flashes seven
7
System board
failure (ROM
detected failure
prior to video).
Replace the system board.
times, once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause. Beeps stop
after fifth iteration
but LEDs continue
until problem is
solved.
Red Power LED
flashes eight times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause. Beeps stop
after fifth iteration
but LEDs continue
until problem is
solved.
8
Invalid ROM
based on bad
checksum.
1. Reflash the ROM with the latest BIOS
image. See the “Boot Block
Emergency Recovery Mode” section of
the Desktop Management Guide on
the Documentation and Diagnostics
CD.
2. Replace the system board.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
C–11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POST Error Messages
POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (Continued)
Activity
Beeps Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Red Power LED
flashes nine times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause. Beeps stop
after fifth iteration
but LEDs continue
until problem is
solved.
9
System powers on
but is unable to
boot.
1. Check that the voltage selector,
located on the rear of the power
supply (some models), is set to the
appropriate voltage. Proper voltage
setting depends on your region.
2. Replace the processor.
3. Replace the system board.
Red Power LED
flashes ten times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause. Beeps stop
after fifth iteration
but LEDs continue
until problem is
solved.
10
Bad option card.
1. Check each option card by removing
the card (one at a time if multiple
cards), then power on the system to
see if fault goes away.
2. Once a bad card is identified, remove
and replace the bad option card.
3. Replace the system board.
C–12
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7730
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POST Error Messages
POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (Continued)
Activity
Beeps Possible Cause
Recommended Action
System does not
power on and
LEDs are not
flashing.
None
System unable to
power on.
Press and hold the power button for less
than 4 seconds. If the hard drive LED turns
green, the power button is working
correctly. Try the following:
1. Check that the voltage selector (some
models), located on the rear of the
power supply, is set to the appropriate
voltage. Proper voltage setting
depends on your region.
2. Replace the system board.
OR
Press and hold the power button for less
than 4 seconds. If the hard drive LED does
not turn on green then:
1. Check that the unit is plugged into a
working AC outlet.
2. Open hood and check that the power
button harness is properly connected
to the system board.
3. Check that both power supply cables
are properly connected to the system
board.
4. Check to see if the 5 V_aux light on
the system board is turned on. If it is
turned on, then replace the power
button harness.
5. If the 5 V_aux light on the system
board is not turned on, remove the
expansion cards one at a time until
the 5 V_aux light on the system board
turns on. If the problem persists,
replace the power supply.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
C–13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POST Error Messages
C–14
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7730
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Preliminary Checklist
This section describes some simple, preliminary tests and guidelines for troubleshooting the
computer without using the diagnostics.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Are the computer and monitor connected to a working electrical outlet?
Is the voltage select switch is set to the appropriate voltage for your region (115V or 230V)?
Is the computer turned on?
Is the green power light illuminated?
Is the monitor turned on?
Is the green monitor light illuminated?
Turn up the monitor brightness and contrast controls if the monitor is dim.
If the system has multiple video sources (embedded, PCI, or PCI-Express adapters) installed
(embedded video on some models only) and a single monitor, the monitor must be plugged
into the monitor connector on the source selected as the primary VGA adapter. During boot,
the other monitor connectors are disabled and if the monitor is connected into these ports, the
monitor will not function. You can select which source will be the default VGA source in
Computer (F10) Setup.
■
■
■
Press and hold any key. If the system beeps, then the keyboard is operating correctly.
Check all cables for loose or incorrect connections.
Reconfigure the computer after installing a non–Plug and Play expansion board or other
option, such as a diskette drive.
■
■
■
Are all of the necessary device drivers installed?
Have all printer drivers been installed for each application?
Remove all bootable media (diskette, CD, or USB device) from the system before turning on
the system.
■
■
Are all switches set correctly?
Is the NIC Remote Wakeup cable (featured on some models) connected between the NIC and
the riser/system board?
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Minor Problems
Solving Minor Problems
Problem
Cause
Possible Solution
Computer appears
Software control of the
power switch is not
1. Press and hold the power button
for at least four seconds until the
computer turns off.
locked up and will not
turn off when the power functional.
button is pressed.
2. Disconnect electrical plug from
outlet.
Computer will not
respond to USB
keyboard or mouse.
Computer is in
standby mode.
Press the power button or press any
key to resume from standby mode.
When attempting to resume from
Ä
standby mode, do not hold
down the power button for more
than four seconds. Otherwise,
the computer will shut down and
you will lose any unsaved data.
System has locked up.
RTC (real-time clock)
time display is incorrect. battery may need to be
replaced.
Restart computer.
Computer date and
1. Reset the date and time under
Control Panel. Computer Setup
can also be used.
2. Replace the RTC battery.
Connecting the
✎
computer to a live
AC outlet prolongs
the life of the RTC
battery.
Computer appears to
pause periodically.
Network driver is loaded
and no network
connection is established. Windows Device Manager to disable
the network controller.
Establish a network connection, or
use Computer Setup or Microsoft
Cursor will not move
using the arrow keys on may be on.
the keypad.
The Num Lock key
Press the Num Lock key. The Num
Lock key can be disabled (or
enabled) in Computer Setup.
There is no sound or
sound volume is too
low.
There is no sound or
sound volume is too low.
1. Check the F10 BIOS settings to
make sure the internal system
speaker is not muted (this setting
does not affect the external
speakers).
2. Make sure the external speakers
are properly connected and
powered on and that the
speakers' volume control is set
correctly.
3. Use the system volume control
available in the operating system
to make sure the speakers are not
muted or to increase the volume.
D–2
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Minor Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Possible Solution
Cannot remove
computer cover or
access panel.
Smart Cover Lock,
featured on some
computers, is locked.
1. Unlock the Smart Cover Lock
using Computer Setup.
2. Use the Smart Cover FailSafe Key
in case of forgotten password,
power loss, or computer
malfunction.
Poor performance is
experienced.
Processor is hot.
1. Ensure airflow to the computer is
not blocked. Leave a 10.2-cm
(4-inch) clearance on all vented
sides of the computer and above
the monitor to permit the required
airflow.
2. Ensure the fans are connected
and working properly (some fans
only operate when needed).
3. Ensure the processor heatsink is
installed properly.
Hard drive is full.
Transfer data from the hard drive to
create more space on the hard drive.
Low on memory.
Add more memory.
Defragment hard drive.
Restart the computer.
Hard drive fragmented.
Program previously
accessed did not release
reserved memory back to
the system
Virus resident of the hard
drive.
Run virus protection program.
Too many applications
running.
1. Close unnecessary applications.
2. Add more memory.
Some software
1. Lower the display resolution for
the current application or consult
the documentation that came with
the application for suggestions on
how to improve performance by
adjusting parameters in the
application.
applications, especially
games, are stressful on the
graphics subsystem.
2. Add more memory.
3. Upgrade the graphics solution.
Restart the computer.
Cause unknown.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Minor Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Possible Solution
Computer powered off
automatically and the
Power LED flashes Red
two times, once every
second, followed by a
two second pause, and
the computer beeps two
times. Beeps continue
for five iterations after
which the LED flashes
will continue until the
problem is resolved.
Processor thermal
1. Ensure computer air vents are not
blocked and the cooling fan is
running.
2. Open hood, press power button,
and see if the processor fan
spins. If not spinning, make sure
the fan's cable is plugged onto
the system board header.
protection activated:
A fan may be blocked or
not turning.
OR
The heatsink is not
properly attached to the
processor.
3. Replace the processor
heatsink-fan assembly.
System does not power
on and the LEDs on the
front of the computer
are not flashing.
System unable to power
on.
Press and hold the power button for
less than 4 seconds. If the hard drive
LED turns green, then:
1. Check that the voltage selector,
located on the rear of the power
supply on some models, is set to
the appropriate voltage. Proper
voltage setting depends on your
region.
2. Remove the expansion cards one
at a time until the 5V_aux light on
the system board turns on.
3. Replace the system board.
OR
Press and hold the power button for
less than 4 seconds. The hard drive
LED does not turn on green.
1. Check that the unit is plugged
into a working AC outlet.
2. Open hood and check that the
power button harness is properly
connected to the system board.
3. Check that both power supply
cables are properly connected to
the system board.
4. Check to see if the 5V_aux light
on the system board is turned on.
If it is turned on, then replace the
power button harness.
5. If the 5V_aux light on the system
board is off, then replace the
power supply.
6. Replace the system board.
D–4
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Power Supply Problems
Solving Power Supply Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Power supply shuts down
intermittently.
Voltage selector switch
on rear of computer
chassis (some models) is
not switched to correct
line voltage (115V or
230V).
Select the proper AC voltage using
the selector switch.
Power supply will not
turn on because of
internal power supply
fault.
Replace the power supply.
Computer powered off
automatically and the
Processor thermal
1. Ensure that the computer air
vents are not blocked and the
cooling fan is running.
protection activated:
Power LED flashes Red two
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps two times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
A fan may be blocked
or not turning.
OR
The heatsink/fan
assembly is not properly
attached to the
processor.
2. Open hood, press the power
button, and see if the processor
fan spins. If the processor fan is
not spinning, make sure the
fan's cable is plugged onto the
system board header.
3. If the fan is pugged in and
seated but not spinning, replace
the processor fan.
problem is resolved.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Power Supply Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Power LED flashes Red, four Power failure (power
1. Check that the voltage selector
(some models), is set to the
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps four times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
supply is overloaded).
appropriate voltage. Proper
voltage depends on the region.
2. Open the hood and ensure the
4- or 6-wire power supply cable
is seated into the connector on
the system board.
problem is resolved.
3. Check if a device is causing the
problem by removing ALL
attached devices (such as hard,
diskette or optical drives, and
expansion cards). Power on the
system. If the system enters the
POST, then power off and
replace one device at a time
and repeat this procedure until
failure occurs. Replace the
device causing the failure.
Continue adding devices one at
a time to ensure all devices are
functioning properly.
4. Replace the power supply.
5. Replace the system board.
D–6
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Diskette Problems
Solving Diskette Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Diskette drive light stays on. Diskette is damaged.
In Microsoft Windows XP, right-click
Start, click Explore, and select a
drive. Select File > Properties >
Tools. Under Error-checking,
click Check Now.
Diskette is incorrectly
inserted.
Remove diskette and reinsert.
Drive cable is not
properly connected.
Reconnect power cable. Ensure that
all four pins are connected.
Drive not found.
Cable is loose.
Reseat diskette drive data and
power cables.
Removable drive is not
seated properly.
Reseat the drive.
Diskette drive cannot write
to a diskette.
Diskette is not
formatted.
Format the diskette.
1. From Windows Explorer select
the disk (A) drive.
2. Right-click the drive letter and
select Format.
3. Select the desired options, and
click Start to begin formatting
the diskette.
Diskette is
write-protected.
Use another diskette or remove the
write protection.
Writing to the wrong
drive.
Check the drive letter in the path
statement.
Not enough space is
left on the diskette.
1. Use another diskette.
2. Delete unneeded files from
diskette.
Legacy diskette writes
are disabled in
Computer Setup.
Enter Computer Setup and enable
Legacy Diskette Write in
Storage > Storage Options.
Diskette is damaged.
Replace the damaged diskette.
Cannot format diskette.
Invalid media reported.
When formatting a disk in MS-DOS,
you may need to specify diskette
capacity. For example, to format a
1.44-MB diskette, type the following
command at the MS-DOS prompt:
FORMAT A: /F:1440
Disk may be
write-protected.
Open the locking device on the
diskette.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Diskette Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Cannot format diskette.
(continued)
Legacy diskette writes
are disabled in
Computer Setup.
Enter Computer Setup and enable
Legacy Diskette Write in
Storage > Storage Options.
A problem has occurred
with a disk transaction.
The directory structure is In Windows XP, right-click Start,
bad, or there is a
click Explore, and select a drive.
Select File > Properties >
Tools. Under Error-checking,
click Check Now.
problem with a file.
Diskette drive cannot read
a diskette.
You are using the wrong Check the type of drive that you
diskette type for the
drive type.
are using and use the correct
diskette type.
You are reading the
wrong drive.
Check the drive letter in the path
statement.
Diskette is damaged.
Replace the diskette with a new one.
“Invalid system disk”
message is displayed.
A diskette that does not When drive activity stops, remove
contain the system files
needed to start the
computer has been
inserted in the drive.
the diskette and press the
Spacebar. The computer should
start up.
Diskette error has
occurred.
Restart the computer by pressing the
power button.
Cannot Boot to Diskette.
Diskette is not bootable. Replace with a bootable diskette.
Diskette boot has been
disabled in Computer
Setup.
1. Run Computer Setup and
enable diskette boot in
Storage > Boot Order.
2. Run Computer Setup and
enable diskette boot in
Storage > Storage
Options > Removable
Media Boot.
Both steps should be used as
✎
the Removable Media
Boot function overrides the
Boot Order enable
command.
Network server mode is Run Computer Setup and disable
enabled in Computer
Setup.
Network Server Mode in
Security > Password Options.
Removable media boot
has been disabled in
Computer Setup.
Run Computer Setup and enable
Removable Media Boot in
Storage > Storage Options>
Removable Media Boot.
D–8
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Hard Drive Problems
Solving Hard Drive Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Hard drive error occurs.
Hard disk has bad
sectors or has failed.
Use a utility to locate and block
usage of bad sectors. If necessary,
reformat the hard disk.
In Windows XP, right-click Start,
click Explore, and select a drive.
Select File > Properties > Tools.
Under Error-checking, click
Check Now.
Disk transaction problem.
Either the directory
In Windows XP, right-click Start,
structure is bad or there click Explore, and select a drive.
is a problem with a file. Select File > Properties > Tools.
Under Error-checking, click
Check Now.
Drive not found (identified). Cable could be loose.
Check cable connections.
The system may not
have automatically
recognized a newly
installed device.
1. See reconfiguration directions in
the Solving Hardware
Installation Problems section. If
the system still does not
recognize the new device,
check to see if the device is
listed within Computer Setup. If
it is listed, the probable cause is
a driver problem. If it is not
listed, the probable cause is a
hardware problem.
2. If this is a newly installed drive,
enter Setup and try adding a
POST delay under Advanced
> Power-On.
The device is attached
to a SATA port that has
been disabled in
Run Computer Setup and ensure the
device’s SATA port is enabled in
Storage > Storage Options.
Computer Setup.
Drive responds slowly
immediately after
power-up.
Run Computer Setup and increase
the POST Delay in Advanced >
Power-On Options.
Nonsystem disk/NTLDR
missing message
System is trying to start
from a non bootable
diskette.
Remove the diskette from the diskette
drive.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Hard Drive Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Nonsystem disk/NTLDR
missing message
(continued)
System is trying to start
from the hard drive, but
the hard drive may have
been damaged.
1. Insert a bootable diskette into
the diskette drive and restart the
computer.
2. Check hard drive format using
fdisk:
If NTFS formatting, use a third
party reader to evaluate the
drive.
If FAT32 formatting, the hard
drive cannot be accessed.
System files missing or
not properly installed.
1. Insert a bootable system diskette
and restart.
2. Check hard drive format using
fdisk:
If NTFS formatting, use a third
party reader to evaluate the
drive.
If FAT32 formatting, the hard
drive cannot be accessed.
3. Install system files for the
appropriate operating system.
Hard drive boot
disabled in Computer
Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and
enable the hard drive entry in the
Storage > Boot Order list.
Bootable hard drive is
If attempting to boot from a hard
not attached as first in a drive, ensure it is attached to system
multi-hard drive
configuration.
board connector labeled P60
SATA 0.
Bootable hard drive's
controller is not listed
first in the Boot Order.
Run the Computer Setup utility and
select Storage > Boot Order
and ensure the bootable hard
drive's controller is listed
immediately under the Hard Drive
entry.
Computer will not boot
from hard drive.
The device is attached
to a SATA port that has
been disabled in
Run the Computer Setup utility and
ensure the device's SATA port is
enabled in Storage > Storage
Options.
Computer Setup.
Boot order is not
correct.
Run the Computer Setup utility and
change boot sequence in Storage
> Boot Order.
Hard Drive's “Emulation Run the Computer Setup utility and
Type” is set to “None.”
change the “Emulation Type” to
“Hard Disk” in the device's details
under Storage > Device
Configuration.
D–10
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Hard Drive Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Computer will not boot
from hard drive.
(continued)
The device is attached
to a SATA port that has
been disabled in
Run the Computer Setup utility and
ensure the device's SATA port is
enabled in Storage > Storage
Options.
Computer Setup.
Hard drive is damaged. Observe if the front panel Power LED
is blinking RED and if any beeps are
heard.
See the Worldwide Limited
Warranty for terms and conditions.
Computer seems to be
locked up.
Program in use has
stopped responding to
commands.
Attempt the normal Windows “Shut
Down” procedure. If this fails, press
the power button for four or more
seconds to turn off the power. To
restart the computer, press the
power button.
Solving Media Card Reader Problems
Solving Media Card Reader Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Media card will not work in By default, Windows XP Either format the media card in the
a digital camera after
formatting it in Microsoft
Windows XP.
will format any media
card with a capacity
digital camera or select FAT file
system to format the media card in a
greater than 32MB with computer with Windows XP.
the FAT32 format. Most
digital cameras use the
FAT (FAT16 & FAT12)
format and can not
operate with a FAT32
formatted card.
A write-protected or locked Media card is locked.
If using an SD card, make sure that
the lock tab located on the right of
the SD card is not in the locked
position. If using a Memory
error occurs when
attempting to write to the
media card.
Locking the media card
is a safety feature that
prevents writing to and
deleting from an
Stick/PRO card, make sure that the
SD/Memory Stick/ PRO lock tab located on the bottom of
card.
the Memory Stick/PRO card is not
in the locked position.
Cannot write to the media
card.
The media card is a
read-only memory
(ROM) card.
Check the manufacturer’s
documentation included with your
card to see if it writable. Refer to the
previous section for a list of
compatible cards.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Media Card Reader Problems
Unable to access data on
the media card after
inserting it into a slot.
The media card is not
inserted properly, is
inserted in the wrong
Ensure that the card is inserted
properly with the gold contact on
the correct side. The green LED will
slot, or is not supported. light if inserted properly.
Do not know how to
remove a media card
correctly.
The computer’s software Open My Computer, right-click
is used to safely eject
the card.
on the corresponding drive icon,
and select Eject. Then pull the card
out of the slot.
Never remove the card when
✎
the green LED is flashing.
After installing the media
The operating system
Wait a few seconds so that the
card reader and booting to needs time to recognize operating system can recognize the
Windows, the reader and
the inserted cards are not
recognized by the
the device if the reader
was just installed into
the computer and you
are turning the PC on
for the first time.
reader and the available ports, and
then recognize whatever media is
inserted in the reader.
computer.
After inserting a media
card in the reader, the
computer attempts to boot
from the media card.
The inserted media card If you do not want to boot from the
has boot capability.
media card, remove it during boot
or do not select the option to boot
from the inserted media card during
the boot process.
Computer will not boot
from a USB removable
drive or media that is
inserted in the USB port on
the media card reader.
The media card reader
is connected to the
computer via the PCI
card, which is not
supported on the HP
Desktop BIOS.
The bootable USB device will have
boot support if you connect the
media card reader to an available
USB connector on the computer’s
system board. If no connector is
available, plug the bootable device
into a different USB port on the
computer.
After installing the media
card reader, the front USB
ports on the computer do
not work.
The USB cable for the
front USB ports was
Reconnect the cable for the front
USB ports. Install the PCI card and
disconnected so that the connect the media reader to the
system board connector USB connector on the PCI card.
could be used for the
reader.
D–12
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Display Problems
Solving Display Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Blank screen (no video).
Monitor is not turned on Turn on the monitor and check that
and monitor light is not
on.
the monitor light is on.
Bad monitor.
Try a different monitor.
The cable connections
are not correct.
Check the cable connections from
the monitor to the computer and to
the electrical outlet.
Screen blanking utility
installed or energy
saver features enabled.
Press any key or click the mouse
button and, if set, type your
password.
System ROM is
Reflash the system ROM with the
latest BIOS image.
corrupted; system is
running in Boot Block
Emergency Recovery
Mode (indicated by
eight red blinks from the
power LED and eight
simultaneous beeps).
Fixed-sync monitor will
not sync at the
resolution chosen.
Ensure that the monitor can accept
the same horizontal scan rate as the
resolution chosen.
Computer is in
standby mode.
Press the power button to resume
from standby mode.
When attempting to resume
Ä
from standby mode, do
not hold down the power
button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the
computer will shut down
and you will lose any
unsaved data.
Monitor cable plugged
into the wrong
connector.
If the computer system has both
an integrated graphics connector
and an add-in graphics card
connector, plug the monitor cable
into the graphics card connector on
the back of the computer.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Display Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Blank screen (no video).
(continued)
Monitor settings in the
computer are not
compatible with the
monitor.
1. Restart the computer and press
F8 during startup when you see
“Press F8” in the bottom right
corner of the screen.
2. Using the keyboard arrow keys,
select Enable VGA Mode
and press Enter.
3. In Windows Control Panel,
double-click the Display icon
and select the Settings tab.
4. Use the sliding control to reset
the resolution.
Cannot enable integrated
graphics after installing a
PCI Express graphics card.
On systems with Intel
The integrated graphics can be
integrated graphics, the enabled in Computer Setup if a
integrated graphics
standard PCI graphics card is
cannot be enabled after installed.
installing a PCI Express
graphics card.
Blank screen and the
Pre-video memory error.
1. Reseat DIMMs. Power on the
power LED flashes Red five
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps five times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
system.
2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to
isolate the faulty module.
3. Replace third-party memory
with HP memory.
4. Replace the system board.
problem is resolved.
Blank screen and the
Pre-video graphics
error.
For systems with a graphics card:
power LED flashes Red six
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps six times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
1. Reseat the graphics card. Power
on the system.
2. Replace the graphics card.
3. Replace the system board.
For systems with integrated
graphics, replace the system board.
problem is resolved.
D–14
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Display Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Blank screen and the
power LED flashes Red
seven times, once every
second, followed by a two
second pause, and the
computer beeps seven
times. Beeps continue for
five iterations after which
the LED flashes will
System board failure
(ROM detected failure
prior to video.)
Replace the system board.
continue until the problem
is resolved.
Monitor does not function
properly when used with
energy saver features.
Monitor without energy
saver capabilities is
being used with energy
saver features enabled.
Disable monitor energy saver
feature.
Dim characters.
The brightness and
contrast controls are not contrast controls.
set properly.
Adjust the monitor brightness and
Cables are not properly Check that the graphics cable is
connected.
securely connected to the graphics
card and the monitor.
Blurry video or requested
resolution cannot be set.
If the graphics controller Install the video drivers included in
was upgraded, the
correct video drivers
may not be loaded.
the upgrade kit.
Monitor is not capable
of displaying requested
resolution.
Change requested resolution.
Graphics card is bad.
Replace the graphics card.
The picture is broken up,
rolls, jitters, or flashes.
The monitor connections
may be incomplete or
the monitor may be
incorrectly adjusted.
1. Be sure the monitor cable is
securely connected to the
computer.
2. In a two-monitor system or if
another monitor is in close
proximity, be sure the monitors
are not interfering with each
other’s electromagnetic field by
moving them apart.
3. Fluorescent lights or fans may
be too close to the monitor.
Monitor needs to be
degaussed.
Degauss the monitor.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Display Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Image is not centered.
Position may need
adjustment.
Press the Menu button to access the
OSD menu. Select
ImageControl/Horizontal
Position or VerticalPosition to
adjust the horizontal or vertical
position of the image.
“No Connection, Check
Signal Cable” displays on
screen.
Monitor video cable is
disconnected.
Connect the video cable between
the monitor and computer.
Ensure the computer power is
Ä
off while connecting the video
cable.
“Out of Range” displays on Video resolution and
Restart the computer and enter Safe
Mode. Change the settings to a
supported setting then restart the
computer so that the new settings
take effect.
screen.
refresh rate are set
higher than what the
monitor supports.
Vibrating or rattling noise
coming from inside a CRT
monitor when powered on.
Monitor degaussing coil None. It is normal for the
has been activated.
degaussing coil to be activated
when the monitor is powered on.
Clicking noise coming from Electronic relays have
None. It is normal for some monitors
to make a clicking noise when
turned on and off, when going in
and out of standby mode, and when
changing resolutions.
inside a CRT monitor.
been activated inside
the monitor.
High pitched noise coming
from inside a flat panel
monitor.
Brightness and/or
contrast settings are too settings.
high.
Lower brightness and/or contrast
Fuzzy focus; streaking,
ghosting, or shadowing
effects; horizontal scrolling
lines; faint vertical bars; or
Flat panel monitor’s
internal digital
conversion circuits may
be unable to correctly
1. Select the monitor’s
Auto-Adjustment option in the
monitor’s on-screen display
menu.
unable to center the picture interpret the output
2. Manually synchronize the Clock
and Clock Phase on-screen
display functions. To download
a SoftPaq that will assist you
with the synchronization, go to
the following Web site, select
the appropriate monitor, and
download either SP32347 or
SP32202:
on the screen.
synchronization of the
graphics card.
(flat panel monitors using
an analog VGA input
connection only)
http://www.hp.com/support
Graphics card is not
seated properly or is
bad.
1. Reseat the graphics card.
2. Replace the graphics card.
D–16
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Display Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Certain typed symbols do
not appear correct.
The font you are using
does not support that
particular symbol.
Use the Character Map to locate the
and select the appropriate symbol.
Click Start > All Programs >
Accessories > System Tools >
Character Map. You can copy
the symbol from the Character Map
into a document.
Solving Audio Problems
Solving Audio Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Sound cuts in and out.
Processor resources are
being used by other
applications.
Shut down all open
processor-intensive applications.
Direct sound latency,
common in many media
player applications.
In Windows XP:
1. From the Control Panel,
select Sounds and Audio
Devices.
2. On the Audio tab, select a
device from the Sound
Playback list.
3. Click the Advanced, button
and select the Performance
tab.
4. Set the Hardware
acceleration slider to None
and the Sample rate
conversion quality slider to
Good and retest the audio.
5. Set the Hardware
acceleration slider to Full
and the Sample rate
conversion quality slider to
Best and retest the audio.
Sound does not come
out of the speaker or
headphones.
Software volume control Double-click the Speaker icon on
is turned down.
the taskbar, then make sure that
Mute is not selected and use the
volume slider to adjust the volume.
Audio is hidden in
Computer Setup.
Enable the audio in Computer
Setup: Security > Device
Security >Audio.
The external speakers
are not turned on.
Turn on the external speakers.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Audio Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Sound does not come
out of the speaker or
headphones.
External speakers
plugged into the wrong
audio jack.
See the sound card documentation
for proper speaker connection.
(continued)
Digital CD audio is not
enabled.
Enable digital CD audio:
1. From the Control Panel, select
System.
2. On the Hardware tab, click
the Device Manager button.
3. Right-click on the CD/DVD
device and select Properties.
4. On the Properties tab, make
sure “Enable digital CD
audio for this CD-ROM
device” is checked.
Headphones or devices Turn on and use headphones or
connected to the
line-out connector mute
the internal speaker.
external speakers, if connected, or
disconnect headphones or external
speakers.
Volume is muted.
1. From the Control Panel
program, click Sound,
Speech and Audio
Devices, then click Sounds
and Audio Devices.
2. Click the Mute check box to
remove the check mark from
the box.
Computer is in
standby mode.
Press the power button to resume
from standby mode.
When attempting to resume
Ä
from standby mode, do
not hold down the power
button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the
computer will shut down
and any unsaved data will
be lost.
Sound from headphones is
not clear or muffled.
Headphones are
Plug the headphones into the
plugged into the rear
headphone connector on the front of
audio output connector. the computer.
The rear audio
connector is for
powered audio devices
and is not designed for
headphone use.
D–18
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Audio Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Computer appears to be
locked up while recording
audio.
The hard disk may be
full.
Before recording, make sure there is
enough free space on the hard disk.
You can also try recording the audio
file in a compressed format.
Solving Printer Problems
Solving Printer Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Printer will not print.
Printer is not turned on
and online.
Turn the printer on and make sure it
is online.
The correct printer
driver for the
1. Install the correct printer driver
for the application.
application are not
installed.
2. Try printing using the
MS-DOS command:
DIR C:\ > [printer port]
where [printer port] is the
address of the printer being
used. If the printer works, reload
the printer driver.
If you are on a network, Make the proper network
you may not have made connections to the printer.
the connection to the
printer.
Printer may have failed. Run printer self-test.
Printer will not turn on.
The cables may not be
connected properly.
Reconnect all cables and check the
power cord and electrical outlet.
Printer prints garbled
information.
The correct printer
driver for the
application is not
installed.
Install the correct printer driver for
the application.
The cables may not be
connected properly.
Reconnect all cables.
Printer memory may be
overloaded.
Reset the printer by turning it off for
one minute, then turn it back on.
Printer is offline.
The printer may be out
of paper.
Check the paper tray and refill it if
it is empty. Select online.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems
Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Keyboard commands and
typing are not recognized
by the computer.
Keyboard connector
is not properly
connected.
1. On the Windows Desktop, click
Start.
2. Click Shut Down. The Shut
Down Windows dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select Shut down.
4. After the shutdown is complete,
reconnect the keyboard to the
back of the computer and
restart the computer.
Program in use has
stopped responding
to commands.
Shut down the computer using
the mouse and then restart the
computer.
Keyboard needs
repairs.
See the Worldwide Limited
Warranty for terms and conditions.
Wireless device error.
1. Check software, if available, for
device status.
2. Check/replace device batteries.
3. Reset receiver and keyboard.
Computer is in
standby mode.
Press the power button to resume
from standby mode.
When attempting to resume
Ä
from standby mode, do
not hold down the power
button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the
computer will shut down
and any unsaved data will
be lost.
Cursor will not move using
the arrow keys on the
keypad.
The Num Lock key
may be on.
Press the Num Lock key. The
Num Lock light should not be on if
you want to use the arrow keys. The
Num Lock key can be disabled
(or enabled) in Computer Setup.
D–20
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Mouse does not respond to Mouse connector is
1. Press Ctrl and Esc at the same
time (or press the Windows
logo key) to display the Start
menu.
movement or is too slow.
not properly plugged
into the back of the
computer.
2. Use the up or down arrow key
to select Shut Down and then
press Enter.
3. Use the up or down arrow
key to select the Shut Down
option and then press Enter.
4. After the shutdown is complete,
plug the mouse connector into
the back of the computer (or the
keyboard) and restart.
Program in use has
stopped responding
to commands.
Shut down the computer using the
keyboard and then restart the
computer.
Mouse may need
cleaning.
Remove the roller ball cover on the
mouse and clean the internal
components.
Mouse may need
repair.
See the Worldwide Limited
Warranty for terms and conditions.
Wireless device error.
1. Check software, if available, for
device status.
2. Check/replace device batteries.
3. Reset receiver and mouse.
Computer is in
standby mode.
Press the power button to resume
from standby mode.
When attempting to resume
Ä
from standby mode, do
not hold down the power
button for more than four
seconds. Otherwise, the
computer will shut down
and you will lose any
unsaved data.
Mouse will only move
Mouse roller ball or the
Remove roller ball cover from the
bottom of the mouse and clean the
internal components with a mouse
cleaning kit.
vertically or horizontally, or rotating encoder shafts
movement is jerky.
that make contact with
the ball are dirty.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Hardware Installation Problems
You may need to reconfigure the computer when you add or remove hardware, such as an
additional diskette drive. If you install a plug and play device, Windows XP automatically
recognizes the device and configures the computer. If you install a non–plug and play device, you
must reconfigure the computer after completing installation of the new hardware. In Windows
XP, use the Add Hardware Wizard and follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
WARNING: When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to the
Å
system board. To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/or hot surfaces, be sure to
disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and allow the internal system components to cool before
touching.
Look for the LED between the DIMM sockets. If the LED is illuminated, the system still has power. Power off
the computer and remove the power cord before proceeding.
Solving Hardware Installation Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
A new device is not
recognized as part of
the system.
Device is not seated or
connected properly.
Ensure that the device is properly
and securely connected and that
pins in the connector are not
bent down.
Cable(s) of new
Ensure that all cables are properly
and securely connected and that
pins in the cable or connector are
not bent down.
external device are
loose or power cables
are unplugged.
Power switch of new
external device is not
turned on.
Turn off the computer, turn on the
external device, then turn on the
computer to integrate the device
with the computer system.
When the system
Reboot the computer and follow the
advised you of changes instructions for accepting the
to the configuration, you changes.
did not accept them.
A plug and play board
may not automatically
configure when
added if the default
configuration conflicts
with other devices.
Use Windows XP Device Manager
to deselect the automatic settings for
the board and choose a basic
configuration that does not cause a
resource conflict. You can also use
Computer Setup to reconfigure or
disable devices to resolve the
resource conflict.
USB ports on the
computer are disabled
in Computer Setup.
Enter Computer Setup (F10) and
enable the USB ports.
D–22
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Hardware Installation Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Computer will not start.
Wrong memory
1. Review the documentation that
came with the system to
modules were used in
the upgrade or memory
modules were installed
in the wrong location.
determine if you are using the
correct memory modules and to
verify the proper installation.
DIMM 1 must always be
installed.
✎
2. Observe the beeps and LED
lights on the front of the
computer. See Appendix C
“POST Error Messages” to
determine possible causes.
To avoid damage to the
Power LED flashes Red five
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps five times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
Memory is installed
incorrectly or is bad.
Ä
DIMMs or the system board,
you must unplug the computer
power cord before attempting
to reseat, install, or remove a
DIMM module.
1. Reseat DIMMs. Power on the
system.
2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to
isolate the faulty module.
problem is resolved.
DIMM 1 must always be
installed.
✎
3. Replace third-party memory
with HP memory.
4. Replace the system board.
Power LED flashes Red six
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps six times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
Graphics card is not
seated properly or is
bad, or system board is
bad.
For systems with a graphics card:
1. Reseat the graphics card. Power
on the system.
2. Replace the graphics card.
3. Replace the system board.
For systems with integrated
graphics, replace the system board.
problem is resolved.
Power LED flashes Red ten
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps ten times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
Bad option card.
1. Check each option card by
removing the cards one at time
(if multiple cards), then power
on the system to see if fault goes
away.
2. Once bad card is identified,
remove and replace bad option
card.
problem is resolved
3. Replace the system board.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Network Problems
These guidelines do not discuss the process of debugging the network cabling.
Solving Network Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Wake-on-LAN feature is
not functioning.
Wake-on-LAN is not
enabled.
Enable Wake-on-LAN.
1. Select Start > Control
Panel.
2. Double-click Network
Connections.
3. Double-click Local Area
Connection.
4. Click Properties.
5. Click Configure.
6. Click the Power
Management tab, then
select the check box to Allow
this device to bring the
computer out of standby.
Network driver does
not detect network
controller.
Network controller is
disabled.
1. Run Computer Setup and
enable network controller.
2. Enable the network controller in
the operating system via the
Device Manager.
Incorrect network driver.
Check the network controller
documentation for the correct driver
or obtain the latest driver from the
manufacturer’s Web site.
Network status link light
never flashes.
No active network is
detected.
Check cabling and network
equipment for proper connection.
The network status
✎
Network controller is not
set up properly.
Check for the device status within
Windows, such as Device
Manager for driver load and the
Network Connections applet
within Windows for link status.
light should flash
when there is
network activity.
Network controller is
disabled.
1. Run Computer Setup and
enable network controller.
2. Enable the network controller in
the operating system via Device
Manager.
Network driver is not
properly loaded.
Reinstall network drivers.
System cannot autosense
the network.
Disable auto-sensing capabilities
and force the system into the correct
operating mode.
D–24
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Network Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Diagnostics reports a
failure.
The cable is not securely
connected.
Ensure that the cable is securely
attached to the network connector
and that the other end of the cable
is securely attached to the correct
device.
The cable is attached to
the incorrect connector.
Ensure that the cable is attached to
the correct connector.
There is a problem with
the cable or a device at
Ensure that the cable and device at
the other end are operating
the other end of the cable. correctly.
Network controller
interrupt is shared with
an expansion board.
Under the Computer Setup
Advanced menu, change the
resource settings for the board.
The network controller
is defective.
Replace the system board (NIC is
integral to the system board).
Diagnostics passes, but
the computer does not
communicate with the
network.
Network drivers are not
loaded, or driver
parameters do not match
current configuration.
Make sure the network drivers are
loaded and that the driver
parameters match the configuration
of the network controller.
Make sure the correct network client
and protocol is installed.
The network controller is
not configured for this
computer.
Select the Network icon in the
Control Panel and configure the
network controller.
Network controller
Network controller
interrupt is shared with an
expansion board.
Under the Computer Setup
Advanced menu, change the
resource settings for the board.
stopped working when
an expansion board was
added to the computer.
The network controller
requires drivers.
Verify that the drivers were not
accidentally deleted when the
drivers for a new expansion board
were installed.
The expansion board
Under the Computer Setup
installed is a network card Advanced menu, change the
(NIC) and conflicts with
the embedded NIC.
resource settings for the board.
Network controller stops
The files containing the
Reinstall the network drivers, using
the Restore Plus! CD.
working without apparent network drivers are
cause.
corrupted.
The cable is not securely
connected.
Ensure that the cable is securely
attached to the network connector
and that the other end of the cable
is securely attached to the correct
device.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Network Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Network controller stops
The network controller is
Replace the system board.
working without apparent defective.
cause.
(continued)
New network card will
not boot.
New network card may be Install a working, industry-standard
defective or may not meet
industry-standard
NIC, or change the boot sequence
to boot from another source.
specifications.
Cannot connect to
network server when
attempting Remote
System Installation.
The network controller is
not configured properly.
Verify Network Connectivity, that a
DHCP Server is present, and that
the Remote System Installation
Server contains the NIC drivers for
your NIC.
System setup utility
reports unprogrammed
EEPROM.
Unprogrammed EEPROM.
Flash the ROM.
D–26
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Memory Problems
CAUTION: Power may still be supplied to the DIMMs when the computer is turned off (depending on
the Management Engine (ME) settings). To avoid damage to the DIMMs or the system board, you must
unplug the computer power cord before attempting to reseat, install, or remove a DIMM module.
Ä
For those systems that support ECC memory, HP does not support mixing ECC and non-ECC memory.
Otherwise, the system will not boot the operating system.
The memory count will be affected by configurations with the Management Engine (ME)
enabled. The ME uses 8MB of system memory in single channel mode or 16 MB of memory in
dual-channel mode to download, decompress, and execute the ME firmware for Out-of-Band
(OOB), third-party data storage, and other management functions.
✎
Solving Memory Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
System will not boot or
does not function properly
after installing additional
memory modules.
Ensure that a memory module is
installed in the black XMM1 socket
on the system board. This socket
must be populated with a memory
module.
A memory module is
not installed in the
XMM1 socket.
Memory module is not
the correct type or
speed grade for this
system or the new
memory module is not
seated properly.
Replace module with the correct
industry-standard device for the
computer. On some models, ECC
and non-ECC memory modules
cannot be mixed.
Out of memory error.
Memory configuration
may not be set up
correctly.
Use the Device Manager to check
memory configuration.
You have run out of
memory to run the
application.
Check the application
documentation to determine the
memory requirements.
Memory count during POST The memory modules
Check that the memory modules
have been installed correctly and
that proper modules are used.
is wrong.
may not be installed
correctly.
Integrated graphics may No action required.
use system memory.
Insufficient memory error
during operation.
Too many Terminate
and Stay Resident
programs (TSRs) are
installed.
Delete any TSRs that you do
not need.
You have run out of
memory for the
application.
Check the memory requirements for
the application or add more
memory to the computer.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Memory Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Power LED flashes Red five
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps five times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
Memory is installed
incorrectly or is bad.
1. Reseat DIMMs. Power on the
system.
2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to
isolate the faulty module.
3. Replace third-party memory
with HP memory.
4. Replace the system board.
problem is resolved.
Solving Processor Problems
.
Solving Processor Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Poor performance is
experienced.
Processor is hot.
1. Make sure the airflow to the
computer is not blocked.
2. Make sure the fans are
connected and working
properly (some fans only
operate when needed).
3. Make sure the processor
heatsink is installed properly.
Power LED flashes Red
three times, once every
second, followed by a two
second pause, and the
computer beeps three
times. Beeps continue for
five iterations after which
the LED flashes will
Processor is not seated
properly or not
installed.
1. Check to see that the processor
is present.
2. Reseat the processor.
continue until the problem
is resolved.
D–28
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems
Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
System will not boot from
CD-ROM or DVD drive.
The device is attached
to a SATA port that has
been disabled in the
Computer Setup utility.
Run the Computer Setup utility and
ensure the device's SATA port is
enabled in Storage > Storage
Options.
Removable Media Boot
is disenabled through
the Computer Setup
utility.
Run the Computer Setup utility and
enable booting to removable media
in Storage > Storage Options.
Ensure CDROM is enabled in
Storage > Boot Order.
Network Server Mode
is enabled in Computer
Setup.
Run the Computer Setup utility and
disable Network Server Mode in
Security > Password Options.
Non-bootable CD in
drive.
Try a bootable CD in the drive.
Boot order not correct.
Run Computer Setup and change
boot sequence in Storage > Boot
Order.
Drive not found (identified). Cable could be loose.
Check cable connections.
The system may not
have automatically
recognized a newly
installed device.
See reconfiguration directions in the
Solving Hardware Installation
Problems section. If the system still
does not recognize the new device,
check to see if the device is listed
within Computer Setup. If it is listed,
the probable cause is a driver
problem. If it is not listed, the
probable cause is a hardware
problem.
If this is a newly installed drive, run
the Computer Setup utility and try
adding a POST delay under
Advanced > Power-On.
The device is attached
to a SATA port that has
been disabled in
Run the Computer Setup utility and
ensure the device's SATA port is
enabled in Storage > Storage
Options.
Computer Setup.
Drive responds slowly
immediately after
power-up.
Run Computer Setup and increase
the POST Delay in Advanced >
Power-On Options.
CD-ROM or DVD devices
Drive is not connected
See the documentation that came
are not detected or driver is properly or not properly with the optional device.
not loaded.
configured.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Movie will not play in the
DVD drive.
Movie may be
regionalized for a
different country.
See the documentation that came
with the DVD drive.
Decoder software is not Install decoder software.
installed.
Damaged media.
Replace media.
Movie rating locked out Use DVD software to remove
by parental lock.
parental lock.
Media installed upside
down.
Reinstall media.
Cannot eject compact disc
(tray-load unit).
Disc not properly seated
in the drive.
1. Turn off the computer and insert
a thin metal rod into the
emergency eject hole and push
firmly.
2. Slowly pull the tray out from the
drive until the tray is fully
extended, then remove the disc.
CD-ROM, CD-RW,
Media has been
Re-insert the Media with the label
facing up.
DVD-ROM, or DVD-R/RW
drive cannot read a disc or
takes too long to start.
inserted upside down.
The DVD-ROM drive
takes longer to start
because it has to
determine the type of
media played, such as
audio or video.
Wait at least 30 seconds to let the
DVD-ROM drive determine the type
of media being played. If the disc
still does not start, read the other
solutions listed for this topic.
CD or DVD disc is dirty. Clean CD or DVD with a CD
cleaning kit.
Windows does not
detect the CD-ROM or
DVD-ROM drive.
1. Use Device Manager to remove
or uninstall the device in
question.
2. Restart the computer and let
Windows detect the device.
Recording audio CDs is
difficult or impossible.
Wrong or poor quality
media type.
1. Try using a slower recording
speed.
2. Verify that you are using the
correct media for the drive.
3. Try a different brand of media.
Quality varies widely between
manufacturers.
USDT computer boots too
slowly after removing a
CD-ROM or DVD drive.
The system is searching
Disconnect the drive cable from the
for the drive during boot system board.
because the drive cable
is still attached to the
system board.
D–30
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Drive Key Problems
Solving Drive Key Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Drive Key is not seen as a
drive letter in Windows XP.
The drive letter after the Change the default drive letter for
last physical drive is not the Drive Key in Windows XP.
available.
USB Drive Key not found
(identified).
The device is attached
to a USB port that has
been hidden in
Run the Computer Setup utility and
ensure that Device available is
selected for All USB Ports and
Front USB Ports under Security
> Device Security.
Computer Setup.
The device was not
properly seated before
power-up.
Ensure the device is fully inserted
into the USB port before applying
power to the system.
System will not boot from
USB Drive Key.
Boot order is not
correct.
Run the Computer Setup utility and
change boot sequence in Storage
> Boot Order.
Removable Media Boot
is disabled in the
Computer Setup utility.
Run the Computer Setup utility and
enable booting to removable media
in Storage > Storage Options.
Ensure USB is enabled in Storage
> Boot Order.
The image on the
device is not bootable.
Follow the procedures described in
the “ROM Flash: Replicating the
Setup: Creating a Bootable Device:
Supported USB Flash Media
Device” section of the Service
Reference Guide.
The computer boots to DOS Drive Key is bootable.
after making a bootable
Drive Key.
Install the Drive Key after the
operating system boots.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Front Panel Component Problems
Solving Front Panel Component Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
A USB device, headphone, It is not properly
1. Turn off the computer.
or microphone is not
recognized by the
computer.
connected.
2. Reconnect the device to the front of
the computer and restart the
computer.
The device does not
have power.
If the USB device requires AC power,
be sure one end is connected to the
device and one end is connected to a
live outlet.
The correct device
driver is not installed.
1. Install the correct driver for the
device.
2. You might need to reboot the
computer.
The cable from the
device to the computer
does not work.
1. If possible, replace the cable.
2. Restart the computer.
The device is not
working.
1. Replace the device.
2. Restart the computer.
D–32
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Internet Access Problems
Solving Internet Access Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Unable to connect to the
Internet.
Internet Service Provider Verify Internet settings or contact the
(ISP) account is not set
up properly.
ISP for assistance.
Modem is not set up
properly.
Reconnect the modem. Verify the
connections are correct using the
quick setup documentation.
Web browser is not set
up properly.
Verify that the Web browser is
installed and set up to work with
your ISP.
Cable/DSL modem is
not plugged in.
Plug in cable/DSL modem. You
should see a “power” LED light on
the front of the cable/DSL modem.
Cable/DSL service is
not available or has
been interrupted due to
bad weather.
Try connecting to the Internet at a
later time or contact your ISP. (If the
cable/DSL service is connected, the
“cable” LED light on the front of the
cable/DSL modem will be on.)
The CAT5 UTP cable is
disconnected.
Connect the CAT5 UTP cable
between the cable modem and the
computers’s RJ-45 connector. (If the
connection is good, the “PC” LED
light on the front of the cable/DSL
modem will be on.)
IP address is not
configured properly.
Contact the ISP for the correct IP
address.
Cookies are corrupted.
Windows XP
1. Select Start > Control
Panel.
2. Double-click Internet
Options.
3. On the General tab, click the
Delete Cookies button.
Windows 2000
1. Select Start > Settings >
Control Panel.
2. Double-click Internet
Options.
3. On the General tab, click the
Delete Cookies button.
Cannot automatically
launch Internet programs.
You must log on to the
ISP before some
programs will start.
Log on to the ISP and launch the
desired program.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Internet Access Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Internet takes too long to
download Web sites.
Modem is not set up
properly.
Verify that the correct modem speed
and COM port are selected.
For Windows XP
1. Select Start > Control
Panel.
2. Double-click System.
3. Click the Hardware tab.
4. In the Device Manager area,
click the Device Manager
button.
5. Double-click Ports (COM &
LPT).
6. Right-click the COM port your
modem uses, then click
Properties.
7. Under Device status, verify
that the modem is working
properly.
8. Under Device usage, verify
the modem is enabled.
9. If there are further problems,
click the Troubleshoot button
and follow the on-screen
instructions.
Windows 2000
1. Select Start > Settings >
Control Panel.
2. Double-click System.
3. Click the Hardware tab.
4. In the Device Manager area,
click the Device Manager
button.
5. Double-click Ports (COM &
LPT).
6. Right-click the COM port the
modem uses, then click
Properties.
7. Under Device status, verify
that the modem is working
properly.
D–34
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Internet Access Problems (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Internet takes too long to
download Web sites.
(continued)
Modem is not set up
properly.
(continued)
8. Under Device usage, verify
the modem is enabled.
9. If there are further problems,
click the Troubleshoot button
and follow the on-screen
instructions.
Solving Software Problems
Most software problems occur as a result of the following:
■
■
■
■
■
The application was not installed or configured correctly.
There is insufficient memory available to run the application.
There is a conflict between applications.
Be sure that all the needed device drivers have been installed.
If you have installed an operating system other than the factory-installed operating system,
check to be sure it is supported on the system.
Solving Software Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Computer will not continue
and no HP logo screen has occurred.
appeared.
POST error has
Observe the beeps and LED lights on
the front of the computer. See
Appendix C, POST Error Messages to
determine possible causes.
See the Restore Kit or the Worldwide
Limited Warranty for terms and
conditions.
Computer will not continue
after HP logo screen has
appeared.
System files may be
damaged.
Use recovery diskette to scan hard
drive for errors.
“Illegal Operation has
Software being used is
Verify that the software is certified by
Microsoft for your version of Windows
(see program packaging for this
information).
Occurred” error message is not Microsoft-certified
displayed.
for your version of
Windows.
Configuration files are
corrupt.
If possible, save all data, close all
programs, and restart the computer.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
D–35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
D–36
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
System Board and Riser Board Reference
Designators
These reference designators are used on most but not all HP system and riser boards.
Designator
Component
BAT
Battery socket/Battery
LED - 5V_Aux (on)
Health-LED
CR1
CR2
CR3
CR4
UID LED
Power LED
CR35
E14
Hard drive activity LED
Boot block header/jumper
Boot block recovery header
ROM recovery header
E15
E16
E25
E49/JP49
CPLD programming header
Clear Password header/jumper
E50
J7
Clear CMOS header
RJ45 jack
Stacked RJ45/Dual USB
Quad stacked USB
First IEEE 1394 connector
J9
J10
J11
J12
Second IEEE 1394 connector
SPDIF input
J13
J14
J20 - 29
J30
SPDIF output
PCI slots
PCI extender slot (male)
J31 - J35
J37
PCI Express slots
Primary SCSI connector
Secondary SCSI connector
Stacked parallel/SCSI connector
AGP slot
J38
J39
J40
J41
J50
J51
J52
J53
x16 PCI Express slot for graphics
First parallel port
Second parallel port
Double-stacked parallel port, Top = Port B, Bottom = Port A
Parallel port over single Serial Port
J54
J55
J65
J66
J67
Parallel port over Serial Port and Video Port
Parallel port over dual VGA ports
DVI connector
Keyboard connector, PS/2 (Closest to power supply)
Mouse connector, PS/2
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
E–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators
Designator
Component (Continued)
J68
J69
J70
J71
J72
Stacked mouse (Top)/keyboard (Bottom) connector
Video connector, VGA
Primary single USB connector
Secondary single USB port
Microphone jack
J73
J74
J75
J76
J77
Line-in jack
Line-out jack
Headphone jack
Volume control
Double-stacked headphone (Bottom)/microphone (Top) connector
J78
J80
J81
J82
J83
Double-stacked line-in (Top)/line-out (Bottom) connector
Stacked serial/audio connector
Primary double-stack USB, Top = Port 2, Bottom = Port 1
Secondary double-stack USB, Top = Port 4, Bottom = Port 3
Triple-stacked audio jack (line in, line out/headphone, microphone)
J101
Security board connector - for security card
PCI slots on riser card
PCI express slots on riser card
Clear password header/jumper
USB front port choke (1st)
J9020-J9029
J9030-J9034
JP49/E49
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
P1
USB rear port choke (1st)
USB rear port choke (2nd)
USB rear port choke (3rd)
USB front port choke (2nd)
P/S connector (20 or 24 pin)
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
Second P/S connector (as required)
Processor 12V header
Secondary Processor 12V header
Main Power/HDD LED connector
Speaker connector
P7
Analog audio connector (from CD-ROM)
Primary chassis fan header or primary CPU heatsink fan
Secondary chassis fan header
P8
P9
P10
P11
Diskette drive connector
Auxiliary Audio connector
P12
P13
P15
P16
P17
Alert on LAN connector
VRM module footprint
AUI connector
Fan command/fan sink header (may be 2 or 4 pin)
Digital audio expansion header
P18
P19
P20
P21
P22
SPDIF internal input header
SPDIF internal output header
Primary IDE connector
Secondary IDE/MultiBay connector
Header for NEWCARD
E–2
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators
Designator
Component (Continued)
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
Header for front panel audio
Header for front panel USB
Internal USB connector 1
Internal USB connector 2
MultiBay header
P29
P30
P40
P41
P52
SCSI LED connector
PCI extender slot (female)
Blade PC graphics connector (outboard)
Blade PC graphics connector (inboard)
Second serial port
P54
P55
P58
P60
P61
Primary serial port
Double stack serial port, Top = Serial B, Bottom = Serial A
Riser edge connector (male-mates with J30)
Primary Serial ATA (SATA) connector
Second Serial ATA (SATA) connector
P62
P63
P64
P65
P66
Third Serial ATA (SATA) connector
Fourth Serial ATA (SATA) connector
VSFF expansion connector
Graphics option connector
Fifth Serial ATA (SATA) connector
P67
P68
P69
P70
P71
Sixth Serial ATA (SATA) connector
Seventh Serial ATA (SATA) connector
Eighth Serial ATA (SATA) connector
Primary (CPU) fan header for fansink
Secondary CPU fan header for fansink
P80
P81
P82
P83
P84
Primary Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector
Second Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector
Third Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector
Fourth Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector
Fifth Serial Attached (SAS) connector
P85
Sixth Serial Attached (SAS) connector
Seventh Serial Attached (SAS) connector
Eighth Serial Attached (SAS) connector
Security board connector, system board
Secondary speaker connector
P86
P87
P101
P106
P124
P125
P126
P150
P216
SW2
Hood lock header
Hood sensor header
Flying parallel port header
Media reader header
White box chassis fan header
Security hood switch on riser card
SW50
U2
Clear CMOS switch/push button
Single chip solution (combined northbridge/southbridge)
U3
North bridge
South bridge
Super I/O
U4
U5
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
E–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators
Designator
Component (Continued)
U6
Clock chip
64 bit Bridge
LOM1
LOM1 EEPROM
LOM1 PHY
U7
U10
U11
U12
U13
U14
U16
U17
U18
Audio Codec
Audio amplifier
LOM2
LOM2 EEPROM
LOM2 PHY
U19
U20
U21
U29
U30
U31
SPI ROM - SOIC-8 footprint
Fan controller
SPI ROM - SO16 footprint
TMDS controller
Parallel port diode array
First serial port transceiver
U32
U46
U50
U51
U52
Second serial port transceiver
VRM controller
USB front port power switch
First USB rear port power switch
Second USB rear port power switch
U53
XBT
Third USB rear port power switch
Battery retainer
XMM1
XMM2 - XMM5
XU1
Memory slot. DIMM1 or RIMM1 populated and tested
Following memory slots
Primary processor socket
XU2
Secondary processor socket
XU15/U15
XU19/U19
Y1
System ROM and Socket (Socket = XU15, ROM = U15)
SPI ROM and socket (XU19 = socket, U19 = SPI ROM)
Primary (TH) system clock crystal
Y2
Secondary (SMT) system clock crystal
Y3
Primary NIC clock crystal
Secondary NIC clock crystal
RTC clock crystal/tie-down
Y4
Y5/H5
E–4
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F
Memory
The dx7300 and dc7700 series computers with Intel-based processors come with double data rate
2 synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR2-SDRAM) dual inline memory modules
(DIMMs).
ÄCAUTION: DDR and DDR2 memory modules are not interchangeable.
DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs
The memory sockets on the system board can be populated with up to four industry-standard
DIMMs. These memory module sockets are populated with at least one preinstalled memory
module. To achieve the maximum memory support, you can populate the system board with up
to 8GB of memory configured in a high-performing dual channel mode.
For proper system operation, the DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs must be:
■
■
industry-standard 240-pin
unbuffered PC2-4300 533 MHz-compliant, PC2-5300 667 MHz-compliant, or PC2-6400
800 MHz-compliant
■
1.8volt DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs
The DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs must also:
■
support CAS latency 4 (DDR2/533 MHz and DDR2/667 MHz) and CAS latency 5
(DDR2/667 MHz and DDR2/800 MHz)
■
contain the mandatory JEDEC SPD information
In addition, the computer supports:
■
■
■
256Mbit, 512Mbit, AND 1 Gbit non-ECC memory technologies
single-sided and double-sided DIMMS
DIMMs constructed with x8 and x16 DDR devices; DIMMs constructed with x4 SDRAM
are not supported
The system will not start if you install unsupported DIMMs.
✎
DIMM Sockets
There are four DIMM sockets on the system board, with two sockets per channel. The sockets are
labeled XMM1, XMM2, XMM3, and XMM4. Sockets XMM1 and XMM2 operate in memory
channel A. Sockets XMM3 and XMM4 operate in memory channel B.
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
F–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
The system board shown may differ from the one in your product.
Item
1
Description
Socket Color
Black
DIMM socket XMM1, Channel A
DIMM socket XMM2, Channel A
DIMM socket XMM3, Channel B
DIMM socket XMM4, Channel B
2
White
3
White
4
White
The system will automatically operate in single channel mode, dual channel mode, or flex mode,
depending on how the DIMMs are installed.
■
The system will operate in single channel mode if the DIMM sockets are populated in one
channel only.
■
The system will operate in a higher-performing dual channel mode if the total memory
capacity of the DIMMs in Channel A is equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in
Channel B. The technology and device width can vary between the channels. For example, if
Channel A is populated with two 256MB DIMMs and Channel B is populated with one
512MB DIMM, the system will operate in dual channel mode.
■
The system will operate in flex mode if the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel
A is not equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel B. In flex mode, the
channel populated with the least amount of memory describes the total amount of memory
assigned to dual channel and the remainder is assigned to single channel. For optimal speed,
the channels should be balanced so that the largest amount of memory is spread between the
two channels. For example, if you are populating the sockets with one 1GB DIMM, two
512MB DIMMs, and one 256MB DIMM, one channel should be populated with the 1GB
DIMM and one 256MB DIMM and the other channel should be populated with the two
512MB DIMMs. With this configuration, 2 GB will run as dual channel and 256 MB will run
as single channel.
■
In any mode, the maximum operational speed is determined by the slowest DIMM in the
system.
F–2
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
4-pin power pin assignments A–6
24-pin MicroFit power pin assignments A–6
24-pin power pin assignments A–6
6-pin power pin assignments A–7
cautions
AC power 5–1
adding devices 1–1
cables 5–8
cooling fan 5–7
A
cover lock security 3–24
electrostatic discharge 5–3
FailSafe Key 3–25
keyboard cleaning 5–6
keyboard keys 5–6
access panel
MT removal and replacement 6–4
Active Management Technology 3–7
adding devices 1–1
Altiris, Deployment Solution Agent 3–2
asset tracking 3–16
operating system installation 1–1
protecting ROM BIOS 3–9
ATA/ATAPI (IDE) drive cable pin assignments
A–5
CD-ROM connector pin assignments A–5
change notification (PCN) 3–8
changing password 3–21
chassis
CMT illustrated 5–1
SFF illustrated 5–2
chassis fan
B
Backup and Recovery Manager 1–2
backwall, SFF removal and replacement 7–18
battery
disposal 5–9
MT removal and replacement 6–35
SFF removal and replacement 7–48
bezel insert
MT removal and replacement 6–8
bezel insert, SFF removal and replacement 7–9
blank screen D–13
MT removal and replacement 6–23
SFF removal and replacement 7–41
chassis types, illustrated 5–1
cleaning
computer 5–6
keyboard 5–6
Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode 3–10
monitor 5–7
mouse 5–7
C
safety precautions 5–5
clearing password 3–22
CMT
chassis, illustrated 5–1
computer cleaning 5–6
computer cover
MT removal and replacement 6–4
computer cover, SFF removal and replacement 7–8
computer pauses D–2
Computer Setup
cable
MT removal and replacement 6–18
proper handling 5–8
cable connections
SFF 7–12
cable lock 3–25
MT 6–2
SFF 7–6
cable management
MT 6–9
accessing 2–3
Advanced menu 2–11
File menu 2–4
overview 2–2
Security menu 2–8
SFF 7–11
cable pinouts
SATA data 4–2
SATA power 4–2
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
Index–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Storage menu 2–5
DVI pin assignments A–10
configuration settings, recovering 2–14
configuring power button 3–15
connections
SFF system board 6–10, 7–12
connector pin assignments A–1 to A–10
Convertible Minitower See CMT
country-specific power cord set requirements B–2
cover lock, smart 3–24
E
electrostatic discharge. See ESD
entering
power-on password 3–20
setup password 3–20
error messages, POST C–1 to C–13
ESD (electrostatic discharge)
materials and equipment 5–4
preventing damage 5–3
D
date and time display problems D–2
DDR2 memory F–1
Ethernet
AUI pin assignments A–2
BNC pin assignments A–1
RJ-45 pin assignments A–2
expansion card
deleting password 3–21
delimiter characters, table 3–22
device drivers, installing 1–1
diagnostic tool for hard drives 3–26
diagnostics utility 2–14 to 2–18
DIMMs F–1
disassembly preparation
MT 6–1
SFF 7–1
diskette drive
MT PCI Express socket removal and
replacement 6–15
MT standard socket removal and replacement
6–14
SFF PCI Express removal and replacement 7–17
SFF removal and replacement 7–15
SFF retainer removal and replacement 7–14
expansion card retainer
MT removal and replacement 6–13
expansion slot cover
MT removal and replacement 6–18
SFF removal and replacement 7–27
diskette drive bezel
MT removal and replacement 6–8
SFF removal and replacement 7–9
drive
MT removal and replacement 6–14
SFF removal and replacement 7–15
external 3.5-inch drive
hard drive capacities 4–3
hard drive partition size 4–3
MT removal and replacement 6–18
protecting 3–26
SFF external removal and replacement 7–27
SFF hard drive removal and replacement 7–29
SFF optical drive removal and replacement
7–25
SFF removal and replacement 7–27
external security
MT 6–2
F
FailSafe key 3–25
SFF 7–3
fan shroud, SFF removal and replacement 7–33
fan, chassis
SFF, external, removal and replacement 7–27
drive bezel
MT 3.5" 6–8
MT 5.25" 6–7
SFF removal and replacement 7–9
drive bezel inserts
SFF 7–10
drive key, problem solving D–31
drive positions
MT 6–17
SFF 7–24
Drivelock security 3–22
dual-state power button 3–15
MT removal and replacement 6–23
fan, power supply 5–7
Fault Notification and Recovery 3–26
fingerprint identification technology 3–26
flashing LEDs C–9
front bezel
MT removal and replacement 6–5
front I/O device
SFF removal and replacement 7–34
front I/O devices
MT removal and replacement 6–25
front I/O panel
MT removal and replacement 6–24
Index–2
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
line-out audio pin assignments A–4
locking Smart Cover Lock 3–25
G
general power cord set requirements B–1
grounding methods 5–4
M
memory
H
DDR2 specifications F–1
MT removal and replacement 6–11
problem solving D–27
SFF removal and replacement 7–13
socket assignments F–2
microphone pin assignments A–3
monitor
hard drive
capacities 4–3
diagnostic tool 3–26
MT removal and replacement 6–18
proper handling 5–8
SATA characteristics 4–1
SFF removal and relacement 7–29
hardware, Proactive Change Notification (PCN)
3–8
headphone pin assignments A–3
heatsink
MT removal and replacement 6–27
SFF removal and replacement 7–35
hood sensor
SFF removal and replacement 7–5
HP Backup and Recovery Manager 1–2, 3–2
HP Client Foundation Suite 3–5
HP Client Manager 3–4
HP Client Premium Suite 3–5
HP Insight Diagnostics 2–14 to 2–18
HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager 3–6
HP OpenView PC Management Solution 3–6
HP OpenView See HP OpenView
HP ProtectTools Security Manager 3–5
HP System Software Manager 3–4
HPQFlash 3–10
blank screen D–13
blurry video D–15
cleaning 5–7
dim characters D–15
pin assignments A–4
mouse
pin assignments A–1
mouse cleaning 5–7
MT
3.5" drive bezel removal and replacement 6–8
5.25" drive bezel removal and replacement 6–7
access panel removal and replacement 6–4
battery removal and replacement 6–35
cable lock 6–2
chassis fan removal and replacement 6–23
disassembly preparation 6–1
diskette drive bezel removal and replacement
6–8
diskette drive cable connecting 6–21
diskette drive cable disconnecting 6–19
drive positions 6–17
drive removal and replacement 6–18
expansion slot cover 6–14
I
image deployment methods 3–1
infrared (IR) transceiver, external, pin assignments
A–4
external security 6–2
initial configuration 3–1
front bezel removal and replacement 6–5
front I/O devices removal and replacement 6–25
front I/O panel removal and replacement 6–24
hard drive cable connecting 6–21
hard drive cable disconnecting 6–18
heatsink removal and replacement 6–27
memory removal and replacement 6–11
optical drive cable connecting 6–21
optical drive cable disconnecting 6–18
padlock 6–3
Insight Diagnostics 2–14 to 2–18
Intel Active Management Technology 3–7
K
key, FailSafe 3–25
keyboard
cleaning 5–6
delimiter characters, national 3–22
pin assignments A–1
L
PCI expansion card removal and replacement
6–14
PCI Express expansion card removal and
replacement 6–15
LEDs
blinking power C–9
blinking PS/2 keyboard C–9
line-in audio pin assignments A–3
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
Index–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
power supply removal and replacement 6–32
power switch assembly removal and
replacement 6–26
preparation for disassembly 6–1
processor removal and replacement 6–29
speaker removal and replacement 6–31
system board removal and replacement 6–34
SFF removal and replacement 7–39
surge-tolerant 3–26
power switch assembly
MT removal and replacement 6–26
SFF removal and replacement 7–47
power-on password
changing 3–21
deleting 3–21
entering 3–20
Power-On Self-Test (POST) 2–1
Preboot Execution Environment (PXE) 3–3
Proactive Change Notification (PCN) 3–8
problems, solving
N
national keyboard delimiter characters 3–22
notification of hardware and software changes
(PCN) 3–8
O
operating guidelines 5–5
optical drive
audio D–17
CD-ROM and DVD drives D–29
diskette D–7
display D–13
drive key D–31
MT removal and replacement 6–18
SFF removal and replacement 7–25
overheating, prevention 5–5
front panel components D–32
hard drive D–9
hardware installation D–22
Internet access D–33
keyboard D–20
media card reader D–11
memory D–27
mouse D–20
network D–24
optical drives D–29
power supply D–5
printer D–19
P
padlock
MT removal and replacement 6–3
SFF 7–7
parallel interface pin assignments A–2
partition, hard drive 4–3
password
changing 3–21
clearing 3–22
deleting 3–21
options 2–8
power-on 2–8, 3–20
security 3–19
processor D–28
software D–35
setup 2–8, 3–19, 3–20
PCI expansion card
MT removal and replacement 6–14
PCI Express expansion card
MT removal and replacement 6–15
SFF removal and replacement 7–17
PCI Express pin assignments A–8
PCN (Proactive Change Notification) 3–8
POST error messages C–1 to C–13
power button
Wake-on-LAN D–24
processor
MT removal and replacement 6–29
problem solving D–28
SFF removal and replacement 7–36
protecting ROM BIOS 3–9
PXE (Preboot Execution Environment) 3–3
R
recovery
configuring 3–15
dual-state 3–15
power cord set requirements
country specific B–2
general B–1
configuration settings 2–14
creating disc recovery set 1–2
software 3–1
reference designators ?? to E–4
reference designators E–1
Remote ROM BIOS Flash 3–9
remote setup 3–3
power supply
fan 5–7
MT removal and replacement 6–32
Remote System Installation 3–3
Index–4
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
removal and replacement
MT 3.5" drive bezel 6–8
MT 5.25" drive bezel 6–7
MT access panel 6–4
retired solutions 3–9
riser board
reference designators E–1
SFF removal and replacement 7–18
riser card,SFF removal and replacement 7–18
ROM flash, BIOS, ROM 3–9
MT battery 6–35
MT cable lock 6–2
MT chassis fan 6–23
MT diskette drive bezel 6–8
MT drive 6–18
S
safety precautions, cleaning 5–5
SATA
MT front bezel 6–5
connectors on system board 4–1
data cable pinouts 4–2
hard drive characteristics 4–1
pin assignments A–7
power cable pinouts 4–2
screws, correct size 5–8
SDRAM (synchronous dynamic random access
memory) F–1
security
MT front I/O devices 6–25
MT front I/O panel 6–24
MT heatsink 6–27
MT memory 6–11
MT padlock 6–3
MT PCI expansion card 6–14
MT PCI Express expansion card 6–15
MT power supply 6–32
MT power switch assembly 6–26
MT processor 6–29
MT speaker 6–31
MT system board 6–34
SFF backwall 7–18
SFF battery 7–48
SFF bezel insert 7–9
SFF cable lock 7–6
SFF chassis fan 7–41
SFF computer cover 7–8
SFF drive bezel 7–9
SFF expansion card 7–15
SFF expansion card retainer 7–14
SFF external 3.5-inch drive 7–27
SFF fan shroud 7–33
SFF front I/O device 7–34
SFF hard drive 7–29
SFF heatsink 7–35
DriveLock 3–22
fingerprint identification technology 3–26
HP ProtectTools Security Manager 3–5
MT external 6–2
password 3–19
SFF 7–6
security features
overview 3–17
serial interface pin assignments A–3
service considerations 5–7
setup password
changing 3–21
deleting 3–21
entering 3–20
setting 3–19
setup, Windows 1–1
SFF
backwall removal and replacement 7–18
battery removal and replacement 7–48
bezel insert removal and replacement 7–9
cable connections 7–12
cable lock removal and replacement 7–6
cable management 7–11
chassis fan removal and replacement 7–41
chassis, illustrated 5–2
computer cover removal and replacement 7–8
disassembly preparation 7–1
drive bezel inserts 7–10
drive bezel removal and replacement 7–9
drive positions 7–24
SFF hood sensor 7–5
SFF memory 7–13
SFF optical drive 7–25
SFF padlock 7–7
SFF PCI Express expansion card 7–17
SFF power supply 7–39
SFF power switch assembly 7–47
SFF processor 7–36
SFF riser card assembly 7–18
SFF Smart Cover Lock 7–3
SFF speaker 7–38
SFF system board 7–42
replicating the setup 3–11 to 3–15
Restore Plus! CD 1–2
expansion card removal and replacement 7–15
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
Index–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
expansion card retainer removal and
replacement 7–14
HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager
3–6
external 3.5-inch drive removal and replacement
7–27
external drive removal and replacement 7–27
external security 7–6
HP OpenView Management Solution 3–6
HP ProtectTools Security Manager 3–5
HP System Software Manager 3–4
HPQFlash 3–10
FailSafe key 7–3
image deployment 3–1
fan shroud removal and replacement 7–33
front I/O device removal and replacement 7–34
hard drive removal and replacement 7–29
heatsink removal and replacement 7–35
hood sensor removal and replacement 7–5
memory removal and replacement 7–13
optical drive removal and replacement 7–25
padlock removal and replacement 7–7
PCI Express expansion card removal and
replacement 7–17
power supply removal and replacement 7–39
power switch assembly removal and
replacement 7–47
preparation for disassembly 7–1
processor removal and replacement 7–36
riser card assembly removal and replacement
7–18
Intel Active Management Technology 3–7
Proactive Change Notification (PCN) 3–8
recovery 3–1
Remote ROM BIOS Flash 3–9
Remote System Installation 3–3
Restore Plus! CD 1–2
retired solutions 3–9
servicing computer 5–7
Subscriber’s Choice 3–9
updating and management 3–3
spare part number
tamper resistant wrench 5–7
Torx T-15 screwdriver 5–7
speaker
MT removal and replacement 6–31
SFF removal and replacement 7–38
static electricity 5–3
Smart Cover Lock removal and replacement 7–3
speaker removal and replacement 7–38
system board connections 6–10, 7–12
system board removal and replacement 7–42
tamper-proof screws 7–3
Subscriber’s Choice 3–9
surge-tolerant power supply 3–26
system board
MT removal and replacement 6–34
reference designators E–1
SATA connectors 4–1
Small Form Factor. See SFF
Smart Cover Lock
SFF removal and replacement 7–42
locking 3–25
SFF removal and replacement 7–3
unlocking 3–25
T
tamper-proof screws
SFF 7–3
Smart Cover Sensor
tool 5–7
protection levels 3–24
setting 3–24
software
temperature control 5–5
thermal sensor 3–26
tools, servicing 5–7
Torx T-15 screwdriver 5–7
troubleshooting D–1 to D–35
Altiris Deployment Solution Agent 3–2
asset tracking 3–16
Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode 3–10
Computer Setup Utilities 2–1
Drive Protection System 3–26
Fault Notification and Recovery 3–26
HP Backup and Recovery Manager 1–2, 3–2
HP Client Foundation Suite 3–5
HP Client Manger 3–4
U
unlocking Smart Cover Lock 3–25
USB pin assignments A–3
V
ventilation, proper 5–5
W
HP Client Premium Suite 3–5
HP Insight Diagnostics 2–14 to 2–18
Wake-on-LAN feature D–24
Web sites
Index–6
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
HP Client Foundation Suite 3–6
HP Client Management Premium Suite 3–5
HP Client Manager 3–5
replicating setup 3–12
replicating setup, BIOS utility 3–12
Restore Plus! CD 1–2
HP OpenView Client Configuration Manager
3–6
HP OpenView Management Suite 3–6
HP ProtectTools Security Manager 3–5
HPQFlash 3–10
ROM BIOS Flash 3–9
Subscriber’s Choice 3–9
support software 3–16
support software CD subscription 1–1
wrench, tamper-resistant
SFF 7–3
Proactive Change Notification (PCN) 3–8
Remote ROM BIOS Flash 3–9
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
433611-001
Index–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Index–8
433611-001
Service Reference Guide, dx7300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|